Home

R&S®FSW-K60 Transient Analysis User Manual

1. 86 Mpo WA Deca tees eaaa a a aa Aa aasa EE A E E nee 86 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 86 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 86 Note that only common conversion loss tables in ac1 files can be edited Special B2000 tables in b2g files can only be imported and deleted Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 198 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ments C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 82 Note When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 special conversion loss tables are required Supported tables have the file extension b2g as opposed to aci for common tables While ac1 files can be used data acquisition with the B2000 option using su
2. eseeeeesesssss 38 Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode eese 41 Measurement Results eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenn nnne nnns 43 Hop Parameters serene a Exe Eug aA aT ae ae Eaa aeae Aaaa aeaea EEE AEREA 44 Chirp Parameters seseeeeese ee eseeeeeee EaR enne nennen aN RANNAR ARCE ANRA nn nnne nr ren nnne 51 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis eere 57 eio iio eet 68 Configuration OVerVIeW onere eed e titu sus anne sced aAa EE Paanan an Ea 68 II nEBI TI uper Dee 70 Input Output and Frontend SettingS cccccsseeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeaees 76 Trigger Settings sac ei tee tiet tesi ic exe E T 100 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region eseeeeeeneeeeeeennnnnnenenn nnn 107 R amp S FSW K60 Contents 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 Gt 7 8 7 9 7 10 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 10 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 Bandwidth Settings iccciccsicccccccssccecccccsiececeecticeeescuedieceseeeaeceesttneaecessntecdesesvveececeeseeececes 111 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings been 113 FM Video Bandwidth ccciicciccceces cceesscet ccccenttee cecensteeceteestteececeesteesdeeeesteddeeeesttedseeensteds 115 Ki Jun 116 Adjusting Settings Automatically esee 118 LL
3. IGENSe TaWEep COUN ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt aae raana eraann rnaen SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt tts tod 301 ISEN e TauwEep FETWINDow L ENG 305 GALGulatesn AR FREQuenocy BANDwWidth c nenne trt nae iin GALGulate n AR FREQuency DEL T8 ci netto teret ee or n tco e iE He be epa etae oss GAL Culatespn AR FREQUuency PERGSTIE s sui cire ener cau cereus qan et reae ease eher a e Ee EREA Ensa GALGulate n AR FREQuency PERGerit S PATe etit aeree reae rani een Ern tee Ti CALEGulatesms ARSTIME EENGIb irri c cirea eee co eet crt Gr een dena P PR Dv E CI E CER ERES ee EEN E CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME PERCent STATe CALEGulatesm ARSTIME STARE e rerit ere rion ear et tei aen Yared pe tenes CALCulate n CHRDetection FREQuency LENGth e oae tanti a ATEN CALCulate n CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin essen CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet END ee CAL Culate nz CHblDetechon FHE Ouencv REterence nennen eene nnns GALGulate n CHRDetection LENGth AU TO rut rnnt ntn rrr ten n pn CALCulate n CHRDetection LENGth MAXimum esses nnne neret ere nnnren nennen inne CAL Culate nzCHb Detechon LENG MINIMUM nennen rennen eee neren rennen GALGulate n CHRDetection POWer LENGIh iot trente tern rr tenni en rnt nae CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin CALCulate
4. 117 136 Select Markei icsse at inse re oe ie ii o Legs 147 Sequencer Aborting EMOTE irssi ieai e entes 246 Activating remote eese rcnt 247 Mode remote ncn qme Shifiting Results 2 24 0 pne eite ont est atia Signal description COMMUN et RE 70 Signal ID External MiXer possesions rto o t m Dude 84 External Mixer Remote control 192 Signal models Errem tence 19 lace 224 Sell EE 70 Signal processing EE MR 16 Signal source Ee auc nite e tco te das t ee e n 190 Signal states Belt le Let WE 71 Single sweep Sc e 116 140 SINGIO ZOOM ee 153 Slope Elie 105 217 Softkeys Amplitude Config TT 95 Auto Level cites tcc elses egen AE eer 118 Capture Offset 107 jen sirinin annda a tl Geant 94 Clear Spectrogram 140 Color Mapping s 137 Continue Single Sweep sssessssss 117 Continuous Sweep sese 116 140 Data acquisition rrr en rentes 107 Display configuration Sie EI UU EE Extemal ee eege eege Free Run n a 5 103 Frequency Config nentes 93 History Depth s 1S7 UO Power we 104 IF Power 103 Ihp t So tce CONG 2 terere 76 Input Frontend EE 76 lege M M 144 Marker Config
5. 2 2 rr toc tera eerte cet tu ab eee ta diee pav ka koe eR EE 253 LAY out e Ee EE 254 LAYout REPLacs WINDOW iecur epu ppc ta edt e rater Pn enne enia Roten 254 Bd DE 254 Beeler pp 256 LAY out WINDowsns DEN ctun etc e rro Ra Ree x ERE ex Ea A aa 256 LAY De du et 256 Bee Tee 257 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt Return values lt NewWindowName gt Example Usage Manual operation Analyzing Transient Effects text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LAY A
6. dtadea as 73 Hop Chirp State T cederent Ree rd the Ren 73 Frequency Offset Chitp alg c rrt et er tte ttt e s 73 Ree 73 Insertitig KE ie TEE EE 73 Deleting a signal SCAG 12 K REENEN tree ete tn tre Enn ete EE nt std RE Hane ces 73 Clearing the signal State table oic riter iere a o 74 Applying changes to the signal state table eene 74 Saving the signal state table to ale 74 Loading a signal state table ER TE 74 Generating a series of hop states cesses eem aucem abe a 74 LE NIN Ee cu itae lean d etu 74 Bo 01 ww mE 74 L No of StS DERI T T TM 74 EE IRE MARNE 75 Signal Description Fil o0 CT E 75 L Applying a global tolerance value nnne 75 L Applying a global frequency offset 75 Auto Mode By default the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application performs an automatic hop chirp detection according to the measured data For an initial overview of the signal at hand this detection is usually sufficient For more accurate results particularly if the input signal is known in advance the signal states can be adapted as required For details see chapter 4 3 3 Automatic vs Manual Hop Chirp State Detection on page 22 Remote command CALCulate n CHRDetection STATes AUTO on page 226 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes AUTO on page 229 Hop Chirp State Index The nominal frequency levels are numbered consecutively in the Hop
7. case cott ra tiv ue cer d t t re e Ce ve 341 SENSe HOP PEASe AVGPIIT EE 340 SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm AVERage esses ri enne nnne nnne nnne nnne nennen 341 SENSe HOP PHASS MAXPm MAXIIUII ecu rte tetuer ne eve cett EENS 341 SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm MINIMUM ccs o eoe etos rrt erre re E Rte Ero ER E PER 342 SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm SDEViation esee ener nnne ener nennen erret 342 SENSe HOP PEHASeMAXPtm2 secret ttt nai vete eee Bv cd peret 341 SENSe JEHOP PHASe RMSPm AVERGBgSet tn re tret breite enu then aE TERVRE STENDERE se a kei nd cese ane ek 342 SENSe HOP PHASe RMSPm MAXimum SENSE HOP PHASE RMSP M MINIMUMI Aricie tcu eh ccrte eni be rr ede teh eatur bru EE 342 ISENSe JHOP PHASe RMSPm SDEVIALOTn tunn carni bete een preteen teh ERR SEE a trn pna E RENEE 342 SENSe HOP PEIASS RMSPIT rta leere rtt nte d ote et ce ed deed tectae ved e PD 342 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPOWeL AVERAgGe circo iier eee eec c Rech rh tbe erede Ex eS 343 SENSe FOP POWerAVEPOWeER MAXIMUM ek 22 oaanc oat tto rint tende ete ener tine titan eene aeta edges 343 SENSe IHOP POWerAVEPOWSF MINIEDUEFTI seciut ttt tnnt cnet tette ettet 343 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower SDEViation 343 SENSe JHOP POWerAMEPONWOFE eege toi tette teret ette rone ere etas esent E pere quee erasa EREEREER 343 SENSe IHOP POWer MAXPoWer AVERA J sissandi ait cete ee tienes 344 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower
8. 145 148 Marker Search Area eene 151 Marker Search Type 151 Marker to Trace 147 Oe WEEN 152 Next MIT Le Eed tmr rei tete pa si d 153 Next Mode X 150 Next Mode Y ain 150 Next Peak wa 152 Norm Delta 146 OUTPUTS CODI cer cedere oec perte ee dpi Us 97 Peak eebe ee eg 152 Preamp pe 97 Ref Level 257 2 5 ee bee een oL odo ds 95 Ref evel ee 96 Refresh Result Config 2119 RFE AteMAULO ET 96 RF Atten Manual stets gid Ee SEN EC 96 EEGEN a 104 Search Config Select Frame inei Loa ees 117 136 ENEE 147 Single Sweep 116 140 Sweep count 133 Timestamp rrr ertt le pea 137 Trace 1 2 3 A Trace Config aa 130 Trigger Offset creen mer merese 105 Trigger Gate Config WEE 100 Specifics for V elle eu 70 Spectrograms EE Clearing Colo CUVE eege 36 141 163 Color ma pping ees 35 137 140 161 Color Schiemle diisikan ta eter dte ides 36 141 Configuring remote essere 301 Detector 189 BIEN 33 FFT window 2 112 Frame COUN GENERE ERIT 18 History depth i eret een rentes 137 Marker legend Markets Markers remote control 317 Result displays eerte ett rn tte t 59 SCalilig EE 35 128 Selecting frames 27117 196 iue rd 13
9. ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 12 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt Channel PowerVs Min l ime lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 lt f lt f loat 134 float loat 142 float lt f loat 140 float ArrayOfFloat A 2 2 Q Data File Format iq tar Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data
10. FM Video Bandwidth A video filter applied during demodulation can filter out unwanted signals The video filter settings are available when you select FM Video BW from the BW menu M V 20 Bandw th mm FM Video Bandwidth Low Pass 0 19 0 BW FM Video Ban ori e EE 115 FM Video Bandwidth Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals The FM Video Bandwidth is available from the Bandwidth or Span menu Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in 96 of the analysis demodulation band width The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths Sweep Settings e None deactivates the FM video bandwidth default Remote command SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE on page 239 6 9 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated They are configured via the SWEEP key Continuous Sweep RUN Ee TC KEE 116 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE etre trt Ea t e e re D rS 116 Conie SINGIG SWOBD EEN 117 Refresh MSRA MSRT Only iicet eite trucco e ree Eit ed ae 117 Measuremekt TI Tip etin ce rette Rete PA ERR ERE XE dr une 117 Sweep Average DOMPM TT 117 Selecting a fame TE 117 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT ke
11. Fig 4 3 Signal processing calculating several spectrograms Resolution bandwidth The resolution bandwidth RBW has an effect on how the spectrum is measured and displayed It determines the frequency resolution of the measured spectrum and is directly coupled to the selected analysis bandwidth ABW The ABW can be the full measurement bandwidth the bandwidth of the analysis region or the length of the result range depending on the evaluation basis of the result display see chapter 4 4 Basis of Evaluation on page 22 If the ABW is changed the resolution bandwidth 4 3 4 3 1 Signal Models is automatically adjusted Which coupling ratios are available depends on the selected FFT Window A small resolution bandwidth has several advantages The smaller the resolution band width the better you can observe signals whose frequencies are close together and the less noise is displayed However a small resolution bandwidth also increases the required measurement time The resolution bandwidth parameters can be defined in the bandwidth configuration see chapter 6 6 Bandwidth Settings on page 111 Time resolution The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The shorter the time span used for each FFT the shorter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes The time resolution to be used for R amp S FSW can be defined manually or automatically acco
12. Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 82 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 82 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 82 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 82 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4
13. SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 300 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent on page 301 SENSe MEASure POINts on page 300 Remote commands exclusive to configuring and performing sweeps e EE 243 INI TIatesns C ONMGBS u a tensione tire ea oco ize ena da exse e ab vendan deo xe due bv nes cnn 244 Nie eebe CONTINUOUS EES ee 245 IER TEE 245 Nimate cn REFRE EE 246 INI Tiatesns SEQuencerREFResh BpALL radar terret e aka aaia 246 INITiatesns SEQ encerABORLE 22 7 rose etc deii eno eee tenes epa eve se eco a iD Y tances 246 INITlate nz GEOuencerJMMedate nennen nennen nnns s nnns 247 INI TIatespnsiSEQuencer le RE 247 Iewen d Te 248 SYSTem SEQUENCE e cer cans ace lascavaccaienadesladadhanessse tacesaccianasascavaracs heccddactessaneceeeaceds 249 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the rem
14. eese nennen nnne 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm MINimum eeeesse eene eene 359 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm SDEViation eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee eene 359 ISENSSICHIR DPA ASC IRIS PIT uii rare cerei e es pre asia ee oa ira iieiaei 359 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm AVERage esses enne nennen enne 359 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm MAXimum e esses eene eren enn 359 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm iMINilmUm iori reci cei ettam a Ya enda rue oves 359 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm SDEViation eese nnne 359 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPOwWer cesses enne enne nennen 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower AVERage ceeeeeeeeeeeeenen nee me enne 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MAXimum esee eene mne 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MlINimum eene nennen 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower SDEViation eeeeeeeeee eene 360 SENSe CHIRp POWerMAXPOWSI 2 tre rannani ee e AE a N E RE tienen 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower AVERage essent rnnt 361 IGENSGe ICHIRp POMWerMAxbower MAXIMUM eene eene 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower MINimum eeeeeeeeeeenen nennen nemen 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower SDEViation NENNEN 361 SENSe JCHIRIEEPOWSEMINPOWOt etre EEEa ron ctn EE then Ria 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower AVERage eeeseeeeeeeeeenenn enne 361 SENSe CHIRp PO
15. upper row 1 RF Spectrum A Region 2 RF Spectrum chirpl middle row 3 Spectrogram full capture default 4 RF Power Time Domain full capture bottom row 5 Chirp Results table default 4 Chirp Statistics table DISP WIND1 EVAL REG LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH RFSP DISP WIND2 EVAL SIGN INIT CONT OFF INIT IMM WAI CALC CHRD SEL LAY REPL WIND 4 RFPT DISP WIND4 EVAL FULL LAY ADD WIND 5 RIGH STAB Configure RF Power Time Domain automatic scaling Programming Examples DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ON Configure range for 1 RF Spectrum A Region DISP WIND1 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO OFF DISP WIND1 TRAC Y SCAL MAX 80 dBM DISP WIND1 TRAC Y SCAL MIN 130 dBM Configure table results show state begin length frequency max fm average power CALC CHRD TABL COL ON STAT BEG LENG FREQ MAXF AVGP Configure Spectrogram MAX detector GAUSS window function Query number of bins SENS WIND3 SGR DET FUNC MAX SWE FFT WIND TYPE GAUS SWE FFT WIND LENG Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieve trace data for RF Power Time Domain TRAC1 DATA TRACe1 TRAC1 DATA X TRACel Retrieve trace length for single transient DISP WIND2 TRAC1 LENG Retrieve table results for first 10 chirps CALC5 CHRD TABL RES 1 10 CALC5 CHRD STAT DATA Export entire statistics result table all params to
16. 24 Results oiher Aerer dh ed eee neces oh a 43 Data format remote 368 369 EXPOMIAG e 134 REMOTE mers 390 Traces exporting remote 368 Updating the display dei TAT Updating the display remote ssssse 246 RF attenuation Auto i 96 Manual 96 RF input 16 Overload protection 38 Overload protection remote ssssss 188 IT ue 188 190 RF overrange IS ER 81 197 RF Power Trigger sae Trigger level remote RF Power Time Domain Result displays eerte en teendes 60 RF Spectrum Result displays erret tentes 59 Ripple POWER euer 50 57 RMS delector nre eerte e neto 29 RUN CONT KOY eens 116 140 RUN SINGLE cog 116 117 140 S Sample Eleng e Recte mates etas 29 el Mie EE 109 Saving FUNCIONS e 142 Scaling Absol te values assioma ai e erected 127 Amplitude range automatically 4127 Automatic a POR OIVISIOM 25 cui ior eec tex clean eter ntn gas RANG aere er ageet eege recta S Ex eee mes exei E cecus Reference position as ELE EE EE Result range Di SDGCII OgralTiS uet coiere edes iet croci Er d e UNNS TERR Y axis Ge RE e EE Search Mode Spectrogram markers ue ettet rtis rete 149 Searching Configuration softkey sssssseee 149 Select Frame le M D
17. 9 To start the measurement select one of the following e RUN SINGLE key e Single Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu The defined number of sweeps are performed then the measurement is stopped While the measurement is running the RUN SINGLE key is highlighted To abort the measurement press the RUN SINGLE key again The key is no longer high lighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started 10 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Traces tab see chapter 7 4 Trace Settings on page 130 e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab see chapter 7 8 Marker Settings on page 144 e Configure the Spectrogram display or FFT parameters on the Spectrogram tab see chapter 7 6 Spectrogram Settings on page 135 11 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To detect hops in a transient measurement This procedure requires the additional option R amp S FSW K60H to be installed 1 2 3 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Transient appli
18. Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 82 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 82 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 82 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe lt State gt If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 81 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables iere Ee TEE 197 SENSe CORR amp ction CVUL BJA uirtute iiu E AAE i 198 SENSe J CORRection CVLCATAIJ E 198 SENSE ed ege EE 198 SENSe CORRection CVL ICOMMAnt 2222122221120 n n Fa tete eret EE EF y E REENEN EAT ENEE 199 SENSe J CORRecton C VESIDA TA EE 199 SENSe CORRection CVE HARMORIG e carecen etras bpek etae bani mna eom aede e RE RER Suae 200 SENSeTCORRectioh CYL MIXET crena eaaa net laeua e eben dn eb sa dut cud 200 SENSe
19. See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 245 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality DISPlay MULAB e Naa 312 GALGulatespnMARKersmco LINK 2 a anna eontra ta ra eun seed ane cna bera ro cr adea a eae drop eroi Bien 313 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table 11 6 12 3 11 6 12 4 Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK State This command defines whether all markers within the selected result display are linked If enabled and you move one marker along the x axis all other markers in the display are moved to the same x axis position The suffix lt m gt is irrele
20. essent nennen rennen eret enne 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency SDEViation eese 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQUGFIGy oi tet erre retire mener ne ree i E irr gen 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm AVERAge ccn eterni aer crei ra Ee rear anaE ena n 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXF mM Ou 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXEm MINirnUrrn oon ott tnt ttn ennt tenen 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation EI En ele enee SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequericy AVERA JE iaaii centre ten ri kenn 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency R I Freouencv MA Nimum ennemis 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency MlINimum esee enne 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency SDEVijation rrt nett rr rtr hana 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequerioy aer rere ert recen ra rh CER EY dee EES 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm AVERage ee SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MAXImUtm ctetu tena tnn nn net ERR nn Rea rk raagis 340 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MlINimu m natns ea rente anh ara aaa eai 340 SENSe HOP FREQuency ERR E RE 340 SENSe HOP FREQUenCy RMS FMR eet 340 SENSE Tel NEE 340 SERIES Def nr 343 SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm AVERage 941 SENSE Ted PRASE AVGPM E TEE 341 SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm MlNimum eeeeseseeeeees esent nee nnne tnn nnne nter entere TE r eiea nin 341 SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm SDEVIation
21. ini in iniit itn nott riae there N kabet th Y Ee ananas 360 Ei Eu ei elle e ell ln UR 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower SDEVIGtIOI eno treten trt onn rr rh eer erts 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower de SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower AVERAQe7 nnno reet mei epe kenn ea ne caesa 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower MAXimUutm ciae tatnen thanh inn enin ann tuni appa 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower MINIMUM neret nennen etre etre 361 SENSe GHIRp POWer MAXPower SDEVIAtlOHni sus cio enne terr nei reae ptm enr tenerae tex etai og Fe aye khao nage 361 SENSe CHIRp POWerMAXRPOWSTT ciei cita rh ttr ntt retten i er e ee XD Reap 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower AVERage cnet eite inre tpe reni dodi 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower MINiimUtm nna tnn intuentur tenor nennen 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower SDEViation 1 eterne there thh tne nnt nani 361 Ei E e elle elle 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRIipple AVERage ertt rent rrr tr rte get 362 SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple MAXimum esses eene enne nnne aieeaa etre nnne 362 SENSe GHIRp POWer PWRERIpple MINIEIUETI esi opone opere perte itp eene cen n rk er nias 362 SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple SDEViatlon rre n rn rer renes 362 SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRIpple uicetu rre nennt eer rre nn rt rrr i ren 362 SENSe CHIRp STATS AVERAge conet Erra EEE PE iae XE ky kx Y nb Co
22. orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval MSRA View MSRA Master Transient Analysis Ref Level 0 00 dBm Freq 1 0GHz Meas Time s Model Hop Att 10 dB Meas BW 80MHz SRate 100 1 Full RF Spectrum A 2 Region FM Time Doma Analysis Interval 0 05 1 2 3 CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts 8 0 MHz Meas BW 80 0 MHz 0 0 s 1001 pts 35 0 us 350 0 us 3 Full Spectrogram 4 Hop 1 Frequency D Interval 0 0s 1 CF 1 0 GHZ 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 0 44 749998779 us 1001 pts 10 0 ps 144 699996632 Us 5 Hop Results Intern TE E ss State Hop Dwell Switching State Avg Hop State Relative Freq Dev Ne indek Begin Time Time Frequency Frequency Deviation Frequency Peak i mei ms kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz 2 0 100 E 77 Fig 4 19 Analysis line in R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 42 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results 5 Measurement Results The data that was measured by the R amp S FSW can be evaluated using various different methods Basis of evaluation For some displays you can define whether the results are calculated for e the entire capture buff
23. 212 de eei BI E M 212 UP AT SMUG ccr batte dte cuire de e parten hd e Rae do le EL enr erba eene aa aA 212 INPUCAT Tenuatiom AU TO E 213 INPUT m 213 INPUT EAT AUT Oy E 214 UPR SE USA Weiss Cr 214 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 95 Configuring Transient Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 96 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifiier hardware Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 97 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 212 The command requires the
24. 5 tret rrr re rrt entr iisa EESAN ena 215 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HYS Teresis cci ponant or epi ere ute ee pne 033 eo NEEN EEGENEN 216 TRIGger SEQuernce LEVel IFPOWSL ci terrre trente een etr re tren n ke rne dE TRIGger SEQuence D EVel IQPOWer niente err mr err er trt e ener th rr Ee iere TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RF Power s TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport 5 anon ertt n rene 216 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPlirig 52 oen tri ntu tr t e rne tnt inn ci 208 lise pss edslis nce M 217 TRIGger SEQuerice SOURCe rrr ere nee rt neni rere ern e EES 218 Index Symbols user EENS 215 A Aborting GU C 116 117 140 ACIDE COUpIING scere tercer eut tte ere reis 77 Activating Transient Analysis remote sssssss 183 Alignment B2000 E 91 lg Ee EE 121 Amplitude Configuration remote Configuration softkey iue M Analysis BUOM m 119 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote sss 329 Configuration MSRA MSRT remote 327 MSRA MSRT 108 222 MSRA MSRT mode rre eere ci 41 Analysis line E leie UC LTE 155 Configuration MSRA remote sss 329 Configuration MSRA MSRT remote ia 32
25. 959292 2 22 Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Activate the transient analysis application INST SEL TA Wu erri Configuring the measurement Set the center frequency FREQ CENT 1GHz Configure a power trigger to detect transient power effects TRIG SEQ SOUR IFP TRIG SEQ LEV IFP 50dBm Configure data acquisition for 5 ms in a 80 MHz bandwidth BAND DEM 80MHz MTIM ims Programming Examples SRAT 100 MHz RLEN 100000 Configure the expected chirp signal manually SIGN MOD CHIR CALC CHRD STAT AUTO OFF CALC CHRD STAT 400kHz 4kHz CALC CHRD LENG AUTO OFF CALC CHRD LENG MIN 0 000003022 CALC CHRD LENG MAX 0 001 Configure the measurement range Frequency calc cut off 5us at beginning and end of chirp CALC CHRD FREQ REF EDGE CALC CHRD FREQ OFFS BEG 0 000005 CALC CHRD FREQ OFFS END 0 000005 Power calc cut off 5 at each end of chirp CALC CHRD POW REF CENT CALC CHRD POW LENG 90 Configure the analysis region analyze 0 5 ms in 20MHz bandwidth in center CALC AR FREQ BAND 40MHz CALC AR FREQ DELT 20MHz CALC AR TIME LENG 500 us CALC AR TIME STAR 250 us Configure the result range manually display 50us at beginning of each chirp but cut off first 5us CALC RES RANG AUTO OFF CALC RES REF RISE CALC RES OFFS 0 000005 CALC RES ALIG LEFT CALC RES LENG 0 00005 emen Configuring the results Result displays
26. Radio PrOQuency Staten EE 77 Input Coupling uice eda ez cce etse e eee deserted 77 deoram nm 77 PISCE LEE 78 FighePass FUS Ee EE 78 bdltzu reo m a AA 78 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 190 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 188 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 Q 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 189 6 3 1 2 Input Output and Frontend Settings Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input sig
27. To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box tap the AL icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA MSRT mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon Analysis Line M POS cn uM AU EE 155 ge E EE 155 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue on page 328 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue on page 329 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 327 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW on page 329 8 How to Perform Transient Analysis The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to analyze transient signal effects with the R amp S FSW K60 option To perform a basic transient analysis measurement 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Transient application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Transient Analysis 3 Select the Input
28. CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Average on page 55 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp rate deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp State Deviation on page 53 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MAXimum lt QueryRange gt Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp r
29. Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Measurement Bandwidth on page 108 SENSe MTIMe lt MeasTime gt This command defines the time data is captured Note that the record length and the measurement time are interdependent see SENSe RLENgth on page 223 Parameters lt MeasTime gt Range 18 75 us to 1 298 ms RST 350 us Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Measurement Time on page 109 11 4 6 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe RLENgth lt SampleCount gt This command defines the record length in samples for the current measurement Note that the record length and the measurement time are interdependent see SENSe MTIMe on page 222 Parameters lt SampleCount gt The maximum record length is limited only by the available memory RST 140000 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operatio
30. Manual operation See Phase Unit on page 129 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe lt Range gt This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 128 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO State If enabled the Y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement Suffix lt t gt irrelevant Parameters for setting and query lt State gt OFF Switch the function off ON Switch the function on RST ON Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 127 See Auto Scale Once on page 127 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 127 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelev
31. Minimum power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range settings see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer MINPower on page 266 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower on page 361 Maximum Power Power parameters Maximum power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range settings see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer MAXPower on page 265 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower on page 360 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis Average Power Power parameters Average power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer AVEPower on page 265 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe
32. Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling GHZ MHZ KHZ HZ Defines the scaling for the frequency parameters Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency AVGFm lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency FMERror lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency FREQuency lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXFm lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency RELFrequency lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSFm lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled the specified frequency parameter is included in the result tables see Fre quency parameters on page 46 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt RST ON Setting parameters lt Scaling gt GHZ MHZ KHZ HZ Defines the scaling for the frequency parameters Manual operation See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 47 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe PHASe ALL STATe lt State gt lt Sc
33. RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 107 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to query the results of the transient analysis Note that for each hop chirp result query you can specify for which hop chirp s you require results e ALL for all hops chirps detected in the entire measurement e CURRent for all hops chirps in the current capture buffer e SELected only for the currently selected hop chirp 11 9 1 Retrieving Results For each hop chirp result you can query either the current value default or the follow ing statistical values for the hops chirps detected in the capture buffer or the entire measurement e AVER average of the results MIN minimum of the results MAX maximum of the results e SDEV standard deviation of the results e Retrieving Information on Detected Hops eeeeeeenme nnns 331 e Retrieving Information on Detected Chips 349 e JRGieving Trace DAA EE 365 e Exporting Table Results to an ASCII Filg rece 367 e Expoltng Trace Results ettet re exusta innen erected ie ues 368 e Exporting UO Results toan Igetar FI g ertet ttt ota nente niet 371 Retrieving Information on Detected Hops The following commands return information on the currently selected or all detected hops CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection AB et Gute 333 cALCulatesm hoPDeltectiop POESIE e da roe e cen tea aethera ere neve nen rna 336 SENSe
34. The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling DEG RAD Defines the scaling for the phase parameters Usage Setting only Manual operation See Phase parameters on page 55 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe AVGPm lt Visability gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe MAXPm lt Visability gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe RMSPm lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled the specified phase deviation parameter is included in the result tables see Phase parameters on page 55 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt RST ON Setting parameters lt Scaling gt DEG RAD Defines the scaling for the phase parameters Manual operation See Phase Deviation RMS on page 55 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer ALL STATe State If enabled all power parameters are included in the result tables see Power parame ters on page 56 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query Scaling is always in dB and need not be specified The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Usage Setting only Manual operation
35. This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 84 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 84 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 84 See Auto ID on page 84 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 192 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0
36. eese nennen 348 SENSE ee Tele EN KEE 348 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching AVERag amp 2 2 coriacea emet tad eese vereda 349 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching MAXimum esses meme 349 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching MINimum eeeeeeeeeennnnnem nemen 349 ISENSe HOP TIMing SWITching SDEVIaligR 1 1 tiet anew niin 349 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe RESults lt Start gt lt End gt This command queries the hop results table The result is a comma separated list of value sets one set for each hop If no query parameters are specified the results for all detected hops are returned Which values are returned depends on the enabled parameters for the results tables see CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe COLumn on page 267 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Query parameters Start integer The hop number of the first hop to be returned Hop numbers start at 1 End integer The hop number of the last hop to be returned Return values ID timestamp which corresponds to the absolute time the beginning of the hop was detected lt HopNo gt consecutive number of detected hop starts at 1 for each new measurement lt Statelndex gt consecutive number of corresponding nominal hop state as defined in the hop States table see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes DATA on page 229 Begin relative time in ms from the capture start at which the signal first enters th
37. etr terere 138 Predefined vi User sSpeciflC redeem rr ertet re EE 138 Columns EXxportirig aes eterne Eeer 123 Connectors IEIDEQ DEMOBD eB eet heels 99 Continue single sweep e UE 117 Continuous sweep SOMKCY 1i repete eio 116 140 Conventions SCOPI comrmiands irren ttes 179 Conversion loss External Mixer Remote control Conversion loss tables ctr tts Available remote control Band remote control Bias remote control Configuring Creating A1 me Se Deleting remote control A External Mixet iicet ren ener nnnc External Mixer Remote control oe Harmonic order remote control Importing External Mixer AAA Managihg eene Mixer type remote control Saving External Mixer Selecting remote control Shifting values External Mixer m Values External Mixer AAA Coupling Input remote EE 188 gi Y 105 D Data acquisition Bandwidth cic tete dates ELI dhewtcd Measurement time s i MSRA MSRT iiaiai tees tinte sc poet tases Performing remote AA 243 Record Heu DEE 109 Ee E 221 Sample Tale tetti ec tton ore eae Ee ED ot 109 Le EE 107 SONKEY IE 107 Data format Remol eninin nenna niea E 368 369 Data shift Data zoom Decimal separator Trace E 123 134 143 Delta markers elle e EE Demo
38. lt YAxis gt AVGPower MAXPower MINPower PWRRipple AVGPower Average power MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power PWRRipple Power ripple lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Chirp Begin Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp POWer X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp power parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt AVGPower MAXPower MINPower PWRRipple AVGPower Average power MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power PWRRipple Power ripple Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp POWer Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp power parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters Y Axis AVGPower MAXPower MINPower PWRRipple AVGPower Average power MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power PWRRipple Power ripple Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp STATe lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp trends over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt INDex Chirp state index lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Chirp Begin Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp STATe X lt XAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Par
39. 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 105 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the tri
40. 4 Full Spectrogram CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 97 Fig 5 5 Spectrogram of a frequency hopper Spectrograms are highly configurable In particular the number of frames and the col ors used to display the power levels can be defined by the user Spectrograms are particularly useful in combination with a spectrum display In this case the spectogram provides an overview of events over time whereas the spectrum provides details for a specific frame For more information on working with spectrograms see chapter 4 9 Working with Spectrograms on page 33 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SGR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 RF Power Time Domain Displays the RF power in dBm versus time 1 Full RF Power Time Domain LAP Clrw 1001 pts 1 0 ms 10 0 ms The RF Power Time Domain trace is determined as follows User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 60 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Results DL RF Time Domain IQ Data a T Trace Data Analysis Region Squared Auto Peak Fiter Magnitude Detector Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RFPT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 FM Time Domain Displays the frequency of the demodulated FM signal versus time 1 Region FM Time Domain 9 10 1001 pts The FM time domain trace is determined as follows L DA TEN IQ Data m FM DL Det Traco D L o Ansiyais Region EM Demodulator VBW Fiter Ano Pask Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FMT see LAYout A
41. 73 Deteclirig TT 22 Frequency offset o inen ee ttp derepente 73 to oc ET iieehiet tian eeiilecs 45 73 En e M 73 Loading T4 Saving 74 Timing e EE Toto teeegesekegue tege deg ed EEN 73 Hop Statistics Table best displays 1 nre i tio reete 64 Hops Average frequeFi Cy erre Det 46 le DEET 50 BASICS M M 19 sel 45 DGLOCHIAG e 19 Display 23 wellt g et d SES geeiert ra 21 46 Evaluation basis retirer 129 Frequency nominal eee etie 46 Frequency deviation rere 46 Frequency Deviation Average suss 48 Frequency Deviation Peak sssssssss 47 Frequency Deviation RMS s es 47 jr Maximum power Measurement range ccceceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeee 27 113 Mihilm tri POWER sir cicer theoria oett 50 Elle 44 Parameters ss 20 44 64 Phase Deviation Average sees 49 Phase Deviation Peak 48 Phase Deviation RMS 49 RRIPPIG POWER P 50 Sele ctinig ME 130 Selecting remote 261 Signal MODES ie aces terere tetra 70 Statistics Result display ssssssssss 64 lee lte EE 46 Hysteresis EI 106 l UO data Export file binary data description 385 Export file parameter description
42. 81 Harmonic Order 2 82 Hatimonic TYPE iii ess erect c eras 82 DI 88 Programming example esses 201 Range oes 582 Restoring DANES 2 e ee ce bie e e 81 RF overrange 81 197 RF Star RF SIOD uo ee e eret hern 81 TEEN le EE 88 Type 82 89 197 External trigger icr ett rtr nen 103 Level remote riisiin dete ds 216 F EFT window JD seed eerte 112 Basics SPECHOGIAND iiec teret rer eter nt I doceri renes 112 File format ele EE 380 Files Format l GQ dalta 12 2 e eter UO data binary XML is I G data input esce ttem VQ parameter XML cite ttd 382 Filters High pass remote A 189 Righ pass RF IBpUb eene es 78 YIG remote 2 2 ite achte aera 189 FM Time Domain Result displays nct etiem tiet 61 FM video bandwidth susastra Measurement example FM Video Bandwidth Configulatioty EE 115 Format Data remolg epe tete edo 368 369 Frame count SE 18 Frames Spectrogram marker ege cerneret tn 146 Free Run ng M M 103 Frequency Configuration remote 2210 Configuration softkey cccecceceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 93 Deviation spicis 46 Hop state nominal 46 FOPAO HOP aniier ZEN rne 47 Ee cS 99 rc M 94 irc M 47 EI 46 Frequency bandwidth Analysis reglOll center rte rre 110 Frequency chirping icEepop e M 21 Frequency delta Analysis feglOll Se
43. CHIRp POWer AVEPower on page 360 Power Ripple Power parameters The power ripple is defined as the ratio of maximum to minimum power inside the power measurement range of the detected hop see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Mea surement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer PWRRipple on page 266 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple on page 362 5 3 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis The data that was measured by the R amp S FSW can be evaluated using various different methods depending on the measurement task Table 5 1 Available evaluation methods and evaluation basis Measurement task Evaluation Evaluation basis Frequency domain analysis RF Spectrum Full capture buffer Analysis region Individual hop chirp Time domain analysis RF Power Time Domain Full capture buffer PM Time Domain Analysis region FM Time Domain Individual hop chirp PM Time Domain Wrapped chirp vs time Joint time frequency analysis Spectrogram Full capture buffer Analysis region Individual hop chirp Demodulation quality analysis Frequency Deviation Time Analysis region Domain Individual hop chirp Phase Deviation Time Domain requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis Measurement ta
44. Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler NIT CONT OFF witches to single sweep mode IT WAI tarts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the weep NST SEL IQ ANALYZER elects the IQ Analyzer channel NIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel o H H H N H E Co H Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh MSRA MSRT only on page 117 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active se
45. Configure t but cut off CALC RES RANG CALC RES REF BAND 40MHz DELT 20MHz LENG lms STAR 2 ms he result range manually display 50us at beginning of each hop first 5us AUTO OFF RISE CALC RES OFFS 0 000005 CALC RES ALIG LEFT CALC RES LENG 0 00005 Configuring the results upper row middle row bottom row Result displays 1 RF Spectrum 3 5 full capture default default 4 2 RF Spectrum 4 Hop Statistics table hopl Spectrogram full capture RF Power Time Domain default A Region Hop Results table Programming Examples DISP WIND1 EVAL REG LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH RFSP DISP WIND2 EVAL SIGN INIT CONT OFF INIT IMM WAI CALC HOPD SEL 1 LAY REPL WIND 4 RFSP DISP WIND3 EVAL REG LAY ADD WIND 6 RIGH STAB Configure RF Power Time Domain automatic scaling DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ON Configure range for 4 RF Spectrum A Region DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO OFF DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL MAX 80 dBM DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL MIN 130 dBM Configure table results show state begin length frequency max fm average power CALC HOPD TABL COL ON STAT BEG DWEL FREQ MAXF AVGP Configure Spectrogram MAX detector largeR no of bins GAUSS window function Query numbe SENS WIND3 SGR DET FUNC MAX SWE FFT WIND TYPE GAUS SWE FFT WIND LENG Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measuremen
46. Default unit S Example CALC CHRD LENG MAX 0 00035 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 76 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection LENGth MINimum lt time gt Defines the minimum chirp length for detection The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters time Range 0 000000251 to 0 00035 RST 0 000000752 Default unit S Example CALC CHRD LENG MIN 0 000001 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 76 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes AUTO lt State gt This command activates and deactivates the auto chirp state detection If deactivated the states defined using CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes DATA are used The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC CHRD STAT AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes DATA lt ChirpRate gt lt Tolerance gt This command sets and queries the chirp state detection table It consists of a comma separated list of value pairs one for each possible chirp state Configuring Transient Analysis Note that the state
47. Defines the reference point for positioning the result range The Offset is given with respect to this value Rise The result range is defined in reference to the rising edge Center The result range is defined in reference to the center of the hop chirp top Fall The result range is defined in reference to the falling edge Remote command CALCulate lt n gt RESult REFerence on page 260 Offset The offset in seconds from the hop chirp edge or center at which the result range refer ence point occurs Remote command CALCulate lt n gt RESult OFFSet on page 259 Alignment Defines the alignment of the result range in relation to the selected Result Range Ref erence Point Left The result range starts at the hop chirp center or selected edge Center The result range is centered around the hop chirp center or selected edge Right The result range ends at the hop chirp center or selected edge Remote command CALCulate lt n gt RESult ALIGnment on page 258 Length Defines the length or duration of the result range Remote command CALCulate lt n gt RESult LENGth on page 259 Result Configuration 7 2 2 Table Configuration 7 2 2 1 During each measurement a large number of statistical and characteristic values are determined The Hop Chirp Statistics and Hop Chirp Results tables display an over view of the parameters selected here Note that the table configuration applies to both result tab
48. RF input remote Overview GonfiguratiOn EE 68 P Panning see Siftiqiso esercita to exe erc I ieri a en a SR UE 26 Parameter Configuration result displays se 124 Parameter Distribution sra 125 W lle ULT 124 Evaluation Programming example cado cinerem eine 378 EK 124 hoop 124 Parameter trend Configuration anette gare ti vente net exe DIR de 125 Evaluation CANIS CL hcc 126 Parameters Elle TS 51 Descriptio p 8 44 51 IEEE 181 St ndatd er rte 44 51 Inputsigial isis oe ct eni mam rane ssec i eres 38 Output i Isesult displays scite cer trs ere deis eee eb ec on 58 Retrieving remote ne eet aa 331 Table configuration m Peak GXCUESIOL occ etie teet etes unu pe iEn Peak list Peak CXCUISION sto eret hebes D rete E 152 Peak search Area spectrograms sese 151 Dorf 150 Mode spectrograms sese 149 150 Type spectrograms sese 151 Peaks Marker positioning isinna anavon nentes 152 Next ee SSES 152 Per division rele M 127 Performing Transient Analysis rtm 157 Persistence spectrum Spectrogram EE 36 Phase Deviation elteren e rebos be ute eie 48 49 Phase Deviation Time Domain Result displays erret terrere 63 Phase results Phase Deviation asisite eeni 55 56 Phase units PM T
49. See Power parameters on page 56 CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer AVEPower State CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer MAXPower State Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer MINPower State CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer PWRRipple State If enabled the Ripple Power column is displayed in the result tables The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Manual operation See Power Ripple on page 57 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe STATe INDex State If enabled the State Index column is displayed in the result tables Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Manual operation See State Index on page 52 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing ALL STATe lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled all timing parameters are included in the result tables see Timing parame ters on page 52 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling S MS US NS Defines the scaling for the timing parameters Usage Setting only Manual operation See Timing parameters on page 52 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection
50. The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Mode on page 131 Analyzing Transient Effects DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Parameters State ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 132 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt
51. e Display Configuraetloh niti rr terere HORE tiene 119 Result e e TE DE 119 Evaluation Bdsla cert rn eerte dE e dus 129 EE 130 e Trace Data Export Configuration enne 133 s Specirogram Selilus nicer erat perdat Bieb iege ee po e atta adegit 135 LE Epon FUNCOMS 142 e Marker obs EE 144 HIE conscio e 153 e Analysis in MSRA MSRT MOE riroraa anean 155 Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the Transient Analysis application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the Overview Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in the main TA Meas menu Up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The evaluation methods available for Transient Analysis are described in chapter 5 3 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis on page 57 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Result Configuration Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 70 The Result Configuration dialog box is avai
52. m PEXQUFSIOn 1 icio ito cat iia eere eee envie cae REOR EVE dvo a du EE RR NA CALCulatecnz MAbker mz GGhamERAMe senten senten enn nnt seines sen rnts sti rnt sen nnt sena CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SARea CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK esee nennen 319 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK 319 CAL Culate nzMAbRkercm GGbRamvMANimum APBOVe rennen nennen 319 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum BELOwW essent 319 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT essent iia 319 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK eese 320 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlNimum ABOWe sese eee rennen 320 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum BELOwW esses 320 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlNimum PEAK esee nennen 321 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe eese neret nnne nnnen nente nns 318 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SAReoa sse nene rennen 318 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK eee 319 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MlNimum PEAK eene 319 CAL Culate nzMAhker m GP Cirooram vMANimum APBCOVe cece cee teeeeceeeeeee tees sense eeeene
53. on page 29 Restricting this value can improve performance during statistical evaulation of large result range lengths Remote command SENSe MEASure POINts on page 300 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 299 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration CT Access Save gt Export gt Trace Export Config or TRACE gt Trace Config gt Trace Data Export The R amp S FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed measurements However you may want to evaluate the data with other external appli cations In this case you can export the measurement data to a standard format file ASCII or CSV The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings that are available for all R amp S FSW applications are not described here See the R amp S FSW User Manual for a description of the standard functions Trace Data Export Configuration Traces 81111 Transient Analysis Traces Trace Data Export Export all Traces and Marker Table Results Indude Instrument Measurement Settings Decimal Separator Point Export to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results eere eng tee aaia rn 134 Include Instrument Measurement Settings cene eene 134 Tac oo M D EE 134 Decimal Separ
54. referred to as the application data For the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for transient analysis The Capture Buffer dis plays show the application data of the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT mode Data acquisition in MSRT mode CH By default the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application uses the largest possible measurement bandwidth Depending on which bandwidth extension options are instal led if any this may be up to 500 MHz However in MSRT mode a maximum of 160 MHz bandwidth is available Thus you must ensure the measurement bandwidth for Transient Analysis is available in MSRT mode Otherwise you will not obtain useful results Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA MSRT Master display indicates the data covered by each application by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application ne
55. result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the
56. 1 Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to the Transient Analysis application are described here POGO esc idstel m 178 COMIMON uU 183 Activating Transient Analysis sieicctee caneecdeneniia kasd a 183 e Configuring Transient Analyse 187 e Capturing Data and Performing SWOeeps seieseemm desee taii ii o a uk aa 243 Analyzing Transient EE 249 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 327 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 329 e IRGINEVING ROSE enr ro rrt tine tae i e d ver cun 330 e Status Repor hg SySIeii EE 372 Programming Exaimples iuiuceees eene een neo ctun neto pg cca FE nena ER nana E Cep Enn ci 372 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands ca
57. 1 MO termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components Remote command TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling on page 208 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 215 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger only rising slopes can be detected For details see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 217 Trigger Settings Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 wit
58. 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 84 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings SENSe MIXer FREQUENCY HAINDOWVBIC icta gedd ta re pte e ete pe ey etta neces 193 SENSe MIXer FREQ uency S T ARI ciii ri erste ee eaa uc Ee Ra ecc d Ru ux cers 193 SENSE MI Xer FRE Queney Me 193 SENSe MIXer HARMoOnic BAND PRESGLt tirer enean eed kann aba a eda aa And cR Lad 193 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue eese neret nnne 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonicHIGH ISTATe 22 aiia ti uio EESEEEEEE KEE 194 ISGENGe IMixer HAbRMontc HIGH MAL ue 195 SENSe TMIXeEBARMODGT d atn eae nacer ri ee rra e eiecit 195 Configuring Transient Analysis ISBNSeJMIXGEBHARMoODIGE EON EE 195 I SENSe MIXeELOSSIMIGEL EE 196 SENSe MIXer EOSS TABLEAU GL ia erai tire ndi cr pue e t pute FR cuya arcte en vanes 196 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW eee tette tenentes 196 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW eese tette tetti 196 SENSE IMI Xer PORTS EE 197 ISGENZGe Mixer RFOVerrangel STATel nennen nemen enne nnns 197 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Th
59. 20 Number of sweeps set UO Data File Format iq tar File contents Preamplifier OFF Description Preamplifier status Number of Windows 6 Number of result displays Window section Window 1 Full RF Time Domain Window number and type Trace section Trace 1 Trace number Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode x Axis Linear x axis scaling mode Start Freq 0 s x axis start value Stop Freq 0 00035 s x axis stop value x Unit s x axis unit y Axis Linear Level Range 0 0010 dBm y axis scaling mode y axis range per division Ref Position 100 0000 96 y axis reference position Ref Value 113 97900 dBm y axis reference value y Unit dBm y axis unit Data section Values 1001 Number of rows of measured values in the table 0 113 97937774658203125 0 113 97937774658203125 upset Measured values lt x value gt lt y value gt A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the Source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to
60. 3 Chirp Results ZRegion FM Time Domain 1 Clrw Chirp Length GI Chirp State Ei N Index 0 100 mE 1001 pts 100 0 uis 1 0 ms 2 Region Spectrogram S Region FM Error Time Domain 1 Clrw 7 E 1001pts Meas BW 100 0 MHz Frame 0 0 0s 100 0 uis Fig 9 12 Typical display arrangement for FM linearity measurement The Frequency Deviation display is dominated by noise but a spike in the up chirp is already clearly visible this spike caused the up chirp to be detected as two individual chirps To remove noise using trace averaging Noise can be removed by averaging the Frequency Deviation Time Domain trace over multiple chirps 1 To restrict trace statistics to the up chirp discard all down chirps by deleting the corresponding chirp state from the chirp state list a From the Meas Config menu select Signal Description Signal States b Select the state index 1 c Select Delete 2 Restrict the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display to a single chirp a Select the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display b Press the MEAS key then select Chirp to restrict the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display to a single chirp 3 Enable trace averaging for the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display a Press the TRACE key then select Trace Config b Fortrace 1 select the Mode Max Hold User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 174 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples c For trace 2 select the Mode Ave
61. 30 dBm Select the MODE key and then the Transient Analysis button Select Signal Description gt Signal Model and select the signal model Chirp From the Meas Config menu select Data Acquisition Set the measurement time to 7 ms Set the measurement bandwidth to 160 MHz o 0o n oo B o wm Define an analysis region to extract the chirped FM signal Make sure that a suffi cient number of chirps are inside the analysis region 1 Magnitude Capture Data Acquisition Full Analysis Region AR Link AR to Full Sample Rate Delta Freq GOTTE O 200000 Time Gate Start am Show Diagram 0 0s 1001 pts 1UU U Us 25 2 Full Spectrogram 7 Meas BW 160 0 MHz Fig 9 9 Configuring an analysis region for a chirped FM signal a Define the starting point of the analysis region as an offset from the center fre quency Delta Freq b Define the width of the analysis region as a Bandwidth Be sure to include several chirps in the frequency range c Define the starting point and the length of the time gate Again be sure to include several chirps in the time gate 10 The chirps are detected automatically The detected chirp states are listed in the order of their occurrence in the Signal States table From the Meas Config menu select Description to check them User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 172 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples P Signal Description Signal Model Signal States Timing
62. 79 Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 The following commands are required to use the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 See also the command for configuring triggers while using the optional 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 TRIGger SEQuence 0OSCilloscope COUPling on page 208 Remote commands exclusive to configuring the 2 GHz bandwidth extension SUE or ER UE EE 205 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATel sse 205 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe 205 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE sss 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN ueeseeeseseeeeeee nene 206 Gv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OGCHoscope LEDGtate nesese oereee reee rre renerne nene 206 Gv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OGCHloscope TChim nnne 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice sess eene 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware sese 208 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling sees 208 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis gt See ee eS SE ee ee EXPort WAVeform DISPlayoff lt FastExport gt Enables or disables the display update on the oscilloscope during data acquisition with the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 As soon as the R amp S FSW B2000 is activate
63. 8 2 How to Export Table Data on page 164 TOP PAA LANs etes e ees demere rte tns ties ee eege 44 e Chip Paramelers cete ntt t RR R FREE Ret RR EN CREE SERE ER ERERRDRN ERR NRAHSERENRRSERO S RERS AMA 51 e Evaluation Methods for Transient Analyse 57 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 43 Hop Parameters 5 1 Hop Parameters If the R amp S FSW K60H option is installed various hop parameters can be determined during transient analysis The hop parameters to be measured are based primarily on the IEEE 181 Standard 181 2003 For detailed descriptions refer to the standard documentation IEEE Stand ard on Transitions hops and Related Waveforms from the IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement I amp M Society 7 July 2003 The following graphic illustrates the main hop parameters and characteristic values For a definition of the values used to determine the measured hop parameters see chapter 4 3 1 Frequency Hopping on page 19 Settling Tolerance PEE EERE AA RR pub eas Sauer dA TIE penta ela 2 FM vs Time Hop End m nd F g Hop Begin Y Switching H Time 3 i c A E E Dwell Time 3 e S S Nominal Hop Freq Time s Fig 5 2 Definition of the main hop parameters and characteristic values In order to obtain these results select the corresponding parameter in the result config uration see chapter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 122 or apply the required
64. Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button from the Overview e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Data Acquisition Config softkey Measurement Bandwidlly 2 p retener hinter E ament ed ne XR NU IMRRR E a ndEE 108 Seege A EINE RRRR URVE EE NEEN 109 Measurement TMO EE 109 Recond SMU Ags paces T tials 109 Analysis E EE 109 EE 110 L Delta EE 110 Lime Gate tengi knisa TR 110 at EE 110 L Linked analysis bandwidth eisereen 110 L Linked analysis time span 110 L Visualizing the Analysis Region Parameters Show Diagram 110 Measurement Bandwidth The measurement bandwidth and Sample Rate are interdependent and define the range of data to be captured For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet All bandwidth extension options including the 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 are supported Note Data acquisition in MSRT mode By default the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application uses the largest possible measurement bandwidth Depending on which bandwidth extension options are installed if any this may be up to 500 MHz How ever in MSRT mode a maximum of 160 MHz bandwidth is available Thus you must Data Acquisition and Analysis Region ensure the measurement bandwidth for Transient Analysis is
65. Applying changes to the signal state table Applies the changes to the current signal state table configuration Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe SAVE on page 232 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes TABLe SAVE on page 227 Saving the signal state table to a file Saves the current signal state table configuration to a file for later use Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe SAVE on page 232 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes TABLe SAVE on page 227 Loading a signal state table from a file Loads the selected signal state table configuration from a file Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe LOAD on page 231 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes TABLe LOAD on page 227 Generating a series of hop states For hop signals additional settings are available which allow you to generate several regularly spaced hop states very easily and quickly These settings are displayed or hidden when you select the More Less button in the Signal States tab of the Signal Description dialog box for hop signals Start Frequency Generating a series of hop states The frequency at which the first hop state will be generated Remote command CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes TABLe STARt on page 232 Step Size Generating a series of hop states The distance between two hop states Remote command CALCulate lt n
66. Arrows on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer or alternatively a time stamp if activated The current frame displayed at the top of the diagram is frame number 0 Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index e g 10 You can display the spectrum diagram of a previous frame by changing the current frame number 4 9 2 Color Maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors in order to visualize them The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs You can define Which colors to use Color scheme e Which value range to apply the color scheme to User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 35 Working with Spectrograms e How the colors are distributed within the value range i e where the focus of the vis ualization lies shape of the color curve The individual colors are assigned to the power levels automatically by the R amp S FSW The Color Scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values Four different color ranges or schemes are available region frame and sweep separator lines see Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep e For each color scheme you can se
67. Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1le on page 312 7 8 3 7 8 3 1 Marker Settings Linked Markers If enabled the markers in all diagrams with the same x axis are linked i e when you move a marker in one window the markers in all other windows are moved to the same x value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 313 Show Marker Legend in Spectrogram Hides or shows marker information within the spectrogram diagram area as opposed to the separate marker table see also Marker Table Display on page 148 This set ting only takes effect if a marker is active Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the MKR gt menu Search settings are also available via the MARKER key or in the vertical Marker Con fig tab of the Analysis dialog box horizontal Search Settings tab e Marker Search Gettngs AA 149 e Elements BIS asiento OR e here Eed 152 Marker Search Settin
68. CORR amp ection CVE PORTS inicie irure fe creta uoc anaa aurae Rad ed EEN 200 E ee e Be 201 SENSeTCORRection CVL SNUMDBer uet ra ace Rote eta tto rette rere td vera EAA 201 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Band K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 88 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201
69. CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Deviation RMS on page 55 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the RMS Phase Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the average power from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Power on page 57 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average power from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query pa
70. Chirp States Number of chirp states 55 Auto Mode On J off 1 00 Hz 4 01 Hz 323 29 Hz 149 95 Hz 335 29 Hz 96 83 Hz 210 10 Hz 37 97 Hz 209 58 Hz 32 73 Hz 424 26 Hz 70 42 Hz 420 97 Hz 74 52 Hz 123 20 Hz 59 82 Hz 119 79 Hz 70 90 Hz 259 66 Hz 61 15 Hz 88 53 Hz 22 17 Hz 83 34 Hz 8 55 Hz 89 12 Hz pb Re CES MPONAUAWNE Fig 9 10 Detected chirp states To analyze the chirp results All detected chirps are indicated in the Results Table 3 Chirp Results Chirp State Chirp Chirp Chirp Chirp Rate Avg Max FM RMS FM ID No F KE Begin Length Rate Deviation Frequency Deviation Deviation n i kHz us kHz u kH 0 5 Fig 9 11 Detected chirps Note that the up chirp is split up into two smaller chirps for some reason P Increase the detection tolerance for the up chirp and note the impact on the detec ted chirp length in the Results Table a From the Meas Config menu select Signal Description Signal States b Set the Auto Mode for the Chirp States to Off ES User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 173 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples c Select the Tolerance for the state index 0 and enter 200 kHz To analyze FM linearity For radar systems using chirped FM signals FM linearity is an important measure ment The FM Time Domain and the Frequency Deviation Time Domain displays are useful to investigate interference of the chirp FM 1 Magnitude Capture 0 0s 1001 pts 100 0 us 1 0 ms
71. Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal sep arator to be used decimal point or comma see Decimal Separator on page 123 The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the two lines containing the measured parameter names and units followed by the measured data in multiple columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semi colon If the spectrogram display is selected when you select the ASCII Trace Export soft key the entire histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data corre sponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded Table 1 1 ASCII file format for table export File contents Header data Description Type R amp S FSW Instrument model Version 5 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2013 Date of data set storage Mode Ta Application Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Rf Att 20 dB Input attenuation El Att 2 0 dB Electrical attenuation Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Meas BW 10000000 Hz Meas Time 0 000350000 s Measurement Bandwidth Measurment time Sweep Count
72. Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency AVGFm on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency on page 338 Hop State Deviation Frequency parameters Deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal hop state frequency Hop Parameters fdev e Where buc Average hop frequency estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a hop Ly m fiom fnom Nominal hop frequency corresponding to a detected or predefined hop state Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency FMERror on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror on page 337 Relative Frequency Hop to Hop Frequency parameters Relative difference in frequency between two hops Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency RELFrequency on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency on page 339 Frequency Deviation Peak Frequency parameters Maximum of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace All hop frequency deviation table values are calculated from the time domain result fdev k fneas k fideai k for hop start lt k lt hop start dwell time where fmeas K instantaneous frequency of the measured signal fiaea K ideal frequency trajectory obt
73. Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 4 Selectthe Data Acquisition button to define the Data Acquisition Full and Analy sis Region AR parameters for the input signal In MSRA MSRT mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 11 Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode on page 41 e Full Measurement Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be cap tured Full Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be captured AR Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be analyzed AR Delta Frequency the offset from the center frequency AR Time Gate Length the absolute length of the time gate AR Time Gate Start the starting point of the time span for analysis Optionally you can link the size of the analysis region to the size of the full capture buffer 5 If necessary filter out unwanted signals using an FM video filter in the BW set tings 6 Select the Result Config button and configure the data basis for evaluation and display e Inthe Scale and Units tabs configure the value range for the y axis in the individual result displays See chapter 7 2 4 Y Axis Scaling on page 126 7 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 see chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 119 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 8 Exit the SmartGrid mode
74. HOP FREQusncy AVGFI icri tre re pi e rp Hoop uma DP opc De RP Drev ER dede ues 336 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFM AVERage ener tnnt nna 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum eese nnne nnne nnne 337 SENSe HOP FREQUERDGcy AVOFPmREMINIRUEE iicet ntt aaa eicit 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation eese nnne 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERTOrI esses enne nennen ene ne rrr rrr nennen 337 SENSe HOP FREQUsRnGcy FMERFOIAVE Rage acad n a taza 337 SENSe HOP FREQuesricy FMERrOr MAXImUmY iiic ciiin roce asado ua aue enai 337 SENSe IHObp FREOuencv EMERror MiNimum eene nennen 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror SDEViation cessisse 337 BENSE HOP FREQUEN e 338 IGENZGeJHOb FbROuencv FREOuencv AVEHRage nene 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum e eese eene 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MlNimum cesses 338 ISGENZeJHOp FREOuencv FREOuency SDEViation niidi 338 SENSE HOF FRE Quen y MANXEmO scis oet ere rne oer ne EES 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm AVERage essem mme eene 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MAXimum eese nennen nnne nnne 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MlINimum eeeeeeeeeeeeenen emen 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation eeeeeeeeene enne 339 SENSe1HOP FREQUEIICV RELFregueney 2 roca corto orit eerte ee be ete 339 ISENZGeJHOb
75. IQ TAR File Format The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Re
76. MAXimum esee aere a terne innate inne teeth sitet tn annie aen 344 SENSe JHOP POWerMAXPower MINIIUII c ron tuti ot ee to evan bnt three tirare tnus 344 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower SDEVIatlOn 2 rti teet eret ertet teat ee Ce ent 344 Ee Te ed e ee 343 SENSe HOP POWer MINPower AVERage 344 SENSe HOP POWerMINPOwerMAXIImUII 2e cierta te tee tente reete reta t etant tne 344 SENSE IHOp POWerMiNPower MiNimum rennen nnne 345 SENSe HOP POWerMINPowWer SDEVIatIlOTi coo ceterorum e seti tetti penses 345 SENSe IHOP POWSFMINPOWGFT EE 344 SENSe HOP POWef PWRRIpple AVERGge 2 cti ccrte een a nete e t ena 345 SENSe J HOP POWer PWRRIipple MAXIImUltTI nna ruine tre KOREK EENE teneret nenne 345 SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple MINim ltrim citrate tette crt tenete tree retreat 345 SENSe HOP POWer PWRRIpple SDEVIatOort coset ice cti er ette e t nione cete i eed 345 SENSe FOP POWer TE 345 SENS amp HOP STATe STAFrequency AVERGage ther tenet nt ne t nr en 346 346 SENSe HOP S TATe STAF requency MINIUITI escono trente tt mp eet gern tpe ken uei dE 347 SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency SDEVialtlon ocio treten rtr eere ee rers 347 SENSe HOP STATe STAFFeg eriCy ccce oct ce rete Enter ttti eret tte e inire e E rcr 346 ISENSe JHOP STATe INDex EAVERGAQGB tree rtr titre rete retenti ti trente penses 346 SENSe HOP STATe INDe
77. MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN 802 11ad R amp S FSW K95 WIGIG 802 11ad LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 193 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN IQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CR
78. Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 CALCulate n CHRDetection POWer OFFSet END Time Defines the end of the measurement range for power results as an offset in seconds from the chirp end This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 236 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC CHRD POW OFFS 50 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 Configuring Transient Analysis CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the power measurement range The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters Reference CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range for power results is defined in refer ence to the chirp s rising or falling edge see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 235 and CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer OFFSet END on page 235 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the chirp Example CALC CHRD POW REF EDGE Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Reference on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency LENGth Percent Defines the length of the measurement range for frequency results in perc
79. PM Time DOfralfi aen pie XR SEES REE e eta n Een nen AR EAKERI A e eEXXXE ura eeu so mee ERE Red e nau aaa 62 PM Time Domain Wrapped nennen enne nnne 63 Phase Deviation Time DOfnigln 2 iioii dcr ensien TEREE 63 Ghutp Rate Time DOrielfi 2 eet e ee Rex etd een ute 64 Hop Chirp Results Table 64 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results ees Hop Ghirp Statistics Table a e eet aa c ed 64 Parameter DISTHDUTION ME 65 Parameter MENO Em 66 Marker Tabl eri etti Deer Ce eu e uere eddie aci enean a eie D e Eon n dee c nu d 66 RF Spectrum The RF Spectrum diagram displays the measured power levels for the detected hops chirps The displayed data corresponds to one particular frame in the spectrogram During a running measurement the most recently captured frame is always displayed During analysis which frame is displayed depends on the selected frame in the spec trogram configuration see Selecting a frame to display on page 117 or the marker position in the spectrogram see Frame for Spectrograms only on page 146 2 Full RF Spectrum 1AP Clrw 1001 pts 8 0 MHz Meas BW 80 0 MHz Fig 5 4 RF Spectrum result display Thus the RF Spectrum is useful to analyze the input signal measured at a specific time in more detail Detected hops chirps are indicated by green bars along the x axis in graphical result displays The selected hop chirp see Select Hop Select Chirp on page 130 is indi cated by a blue bar
80. POWer ALL STATe eese CAL Culate nz CHb Detechon T AB ebOWer AVE Power CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer MAXPower CALCulate n CHRDetection TAPBlebOWerMihNbower A CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer PWRRIipple esses nennen CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TE 351 CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe STA Te INDEX A CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing ALL STATe CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe TIMing BEGin ener trennen nennen CAL Culate sn DEETamarkersmo AOFF ren tutte rire Eee ier ce te etg o ra EET PRAE CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt LIN Kocaer reae cerent benc E RENSA ENEE CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarkercmz LINK TOMAbkercmz enne nnne nnne GALCulate n DELTamarkersm MAXiIm r LEFT ise cii uere oa re bcr riter onere eter CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT SN CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MA NimumRIGHt A CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumy PEAK essent nennen CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNmmmum LEET CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MihNimumbRIGHt A CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK eese nennen CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt MREF sticks enero rtt a A S Ea CAL Culate nz D I Tamarkercmz GGhRamERAMe A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea
81. RMS phase deviation Setting parameters Y Axis COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of hops in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured hops in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt Usage Setting only CALCulate n DISTribution HOP POWer XAxis lt YAxis gt Configures the Parameter Distribution result display for hop power parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt AVGPower MAXPower MINPower PWRRipple MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power AVGPower Average power PWRRipple Power ripple Setting parameters lt YAxis gt COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of hops in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured hops in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP STATe XAxis lt YAxis gt Configures the Parameter Distribution result display for hop state parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt INDex STAFrequency INDex Hop state index STAFrequency State frequency nominal Setting parameters lt YAxis gt COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of hops in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured hops in which the parameter v
82. RST ON Example CALC HOPD DWEL AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection DWELI MAXimum lt time gt This command sets the maximum time for hop detection The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt time gt Range 0 000000052 to 0 00035 RST 0 00035 Default unit S Example CALC HOPD DWEL MAX 0 00129822 Configuring Transient Analysis Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 76 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection DWELI MINimum lt time gt This command sets the minimum time for hop detection The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters time Range 0 000000017 to 0 00035 RST 0 000000052 Default unit S Example CALC HOPD DWEL MIN 0 000001 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 76 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes AUTO State This command activates and deactivates the auto hop state detection If deactivated the states defined using CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes DATA are used The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CALC HOPD STAT AUTO
83. RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslIqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the ig tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 g xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt Q Data File Format iq tar lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS
84. SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 106 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 104 Configuring Transient Analysis TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP
85. See Saving the signal state table to a file on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe STARt This command queries the last stored starting value for generating multiple states The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt Start gt Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Frequency on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe STEP This command queries the last stored step size for generating multiple states The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt Step gt Usage Query only Manual operation See Step Size on page 74 Configuring Transient Analysis CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe TOLerance Tolerance This command applies a tolerance to all states in the state table The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Tolerance Default unit HZ Manual operation See Applying a global tolerance value on page 75 11 4 9 Configuring the Measurement Range For some frequency or power calculations it may be useful not to take the entire dwell time of the hop or length of the chirp into consideration but only a certain range within the dwell time length o These settings are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechon FREOuencv LENG eene 233 CALOCulate n CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin sse 234 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechon FREOuencv OEFS
86. TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS 260 Manual operation See Comment on page 88 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 89 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOS
87. TABLe TIMing BEGin lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing LENGth lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing RATE lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled the specified timing parameter is included in the result tables see Timing parameters on page 52 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query 11 6 5 2 Analyzing Transient Effects The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling GHZ US MHZ US KHZ US HZ US Defines the scaling for the timing parameters Manual operation See Chirp Rate on page 53 Hop Results CALCulat lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe COLUMN eene nennen ni 267 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechion AB ett Ouencv ALLTSTATel 270 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechionTAPBletRtOuencv AVGEm eren 270 CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency FMERTOor esee 270 CAL Culate nzHObPDetechon TAPBletRtOuencyv EREOuency rnnr rrr rnnne 270 CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXFm eese 270 CAL Culate nzHObDetechon TAPBletRtOuencv RE FEreouency renens 270 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSF ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaes 270 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechionTAPBlebAGe ALUTSTATel eneen eeererererersrsrereenee 271 CAL Culate nzHObPDetechionTAPBlebHAGe AVGbm eene 271 CALOCul
88. The hop chirp index as displayed in the Hop Chirp Results Table is indicated at the bottom of each bar In the RF Spectrum for the full capture buffer the analysis region AR is indicated by vertical blue lines Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RFSP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 Spectrogram The spectrogram is a way of displaying multiple consecutive spectra over time The power or more exactly the power level which is usually displayed over frequency is displayed over frequency and time Thus joint analysis in the time and frequency domain is possible Graphically time and frequency represent the vertical and horizontal axes of the dia gram Each coordinate frequency f time t of the diagram is filled with a color repre senting the level for the respective frequency and time At the beginning of a measurement the diagram is empty As the measurement advan ces the graph is filled line by line from top to bottom Lines in the spectrogram are called frames as each frame represents one spectrum E User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 59 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results As the graph fills from top to bottom the latest spectrum is always the topmost line whereas older frames move towards the bottom However older frames that have dis appeared from the visible display area can be returned to view by selecting a particular frame or timestamp The frames for each individual sweep are separated by colored lines
89. The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC RES LENG lus Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Length on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt RESult OFFSet Time The offset in seconds from the hop chirp edge or center at which the result range refer ence point occurs The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Analyzing Transient Effects Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Offset on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt RESult RANGe AUTO lt ON OFF gt Defines whether the result range length is determined automatically according to the width of the selected hop chirp The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC RES RANG AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operati
90. This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 85 See Bias on page 88 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 Configuring Transient Analysis This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 86 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS
91. UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 95 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 141 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STYLe lt ColorScheme gt This command selects the color scheme 11 6 12 11 6 12 1 Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters lt ColorScheme gt HOT Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low lev els red colors indicate high ones COLD Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low lev els blue colors indicate high ones RADar Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between GRAYscale Shows the results in shades of gray RST HOT Example DISP WIND SPEC COL GRAY Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and white Manual operation See Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 141 Working with Markers Remotely In the Transient Analysis application up to 16 markers or delta markers can be activa ted for each window simultaneously e Setting Up individual ET EE 307 e General Marker Seltihgs e rre tere ett Ferne dE naX SEENEN 312 e Configuring and Performing a Marker Gearch 313 e Positioning the WGK GM eorr e etre ter ttl o tach xen uode ete ite d 313 e Marker Search Spectrograms 2 erede tete eed ia 317 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CAL Gulate smnsMARKersmsiAOEPF E 308 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz
92. User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 104 Trigger Settings MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for transient analysis See Capture Offset For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual WIG GSE SOUS circa tebe EE 102 LEE E 102 Ez 11 m T 103 L External Trigger AE geen nik eeu 103 d ge e a a tel etal 103 Mi uias ELT 103 LNO PONE LT 104 2 jT 104 xr d ERREUR T 104 L Drop Out TME MED OO EE 105 c E NENNT 105 ME Qi MN 105 uo MeT 105 is o NER 106 DEE euer E 106 BU ce T PH 106 BE Cl NE MEER m E T 106 2 ahaa eric lista H 107 L Pulse engi DNO LO ia N 107 L Send Ei ADD 107 In 107 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run
93. a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker Position X value on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position 11 6 12 2 Analyzing Transient Effects Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode
94. additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 97 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input Configuring Transient Analysis If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 96 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt O
95. amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics Numeric results displayed in the result or statistics tables are always calculated based on the analysis region For graphical result displays based on the analysis region the x axis range corre sponds to the analysis region length see Time Gate Length on page 110 The analysis region is indicated by a colored frame in the Full Spectrogram display and by vertical blue lines in result displays based on the full capture buffer 3 Full Spectrogram Ge SE 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 0 The colors used to indicate the analysis range in spectrograms are configurable see Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep Separator Colors on page 137 Defining the analysis region There are different methods of defining the analysis region e absolute definition by defining an absolute frequency span and an absolute time gate The frequency span is defined by an offset from the center frequency and an analysis bandwidth The time gate is defined by a starting point after measurement begin and the gate length e relative definition by linking the analysis region to the full capture buffer and defin ing a percentage of the full bandwidth and measurement time The specified frequency offset or time gate start are also considered for relative values e graphically The analysis region is indicated by a dotted frame in the Spectrogram display and by vertical lines in the full spectrum display I
96. command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 185 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 185 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IO Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Activating Transient Analysis Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt Channel
97. complete hops chirps are available gaps will occur in the error display The phase deviation for the analysis region in the hop model is calculated as follows In the chirp model it is calculated as For an individual hop chirp k Result Range Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PDEV see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 mum PEINE S UU User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 63 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results WEEN Chirp Rate Time Domain Displays the chirp rate versus time This display requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H 2 Region Chirp Rate Time Domain 9 10 1001 pts The chirp rate time domain trace is determined as follows Em Chirp Rat IQ Data ge EM gt Pe Det Time Domain L DL Trace Data Analysis Region Chip Rate Auto Peak Fiter FM Demodulat VBW Fe E Dernodulatr WP Estimation Fiter Detectar Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CRT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 Hop Chirp Results Table Displays the automatically detected hop chirp parameters in a table of results This dis play requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H Which parameters are displayed depends on the Result Configuration see chap ter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 122 The currently selected hop chirp is highlighted blue The remaining hops chirps contained in the current capture buffer are highlighted green 5 Hop Results Hop Switching Hop State Relative Freq Dev i Peak Sta
98. dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument 6 3 1 4 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application supports the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 if installed The following settings are available for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 e SSMS Al E 90 WE une RR 91 General Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Settings Multiview Spectrum 1 EE Power Sensor External Generator Probes B2000 Settings B2000 State TCPIP Address or Computer name Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel prem CILILILI The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box B2000 State Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Remote c
99. e CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimumg PEAK eese 322 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MlINimum PEAK eese 323 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXiMUM ABOVE nennen 323 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum ABOWe cee eee e cee e cess teat eene 324 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum BELoOw eese 324 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT is CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK eee 325 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram F RAMe sess eene 322 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SARea essere nennen 322 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK eene 322 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWe essen CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELoOw eese CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT essent CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK ap CALOCulate n DELTamarker
100. enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling S MS US NS Defines the scaling for the timing parameters Manual operation See Switching Time on page 46 Analyzing Transient Effects 11 6 6 Configuring Parameter Distribution Displays For details on the parameter distribution result displays see Parameter Distribution on page 65 CALCulatesn DISTribution CHIRp FREQGQ UenGy ir intererit nuu nena udin cn cone 274 CAL Culate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp PHASe 1 22 Literie a 275 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp POWer esses nen nnns 275 CAL Culate lt n gt DIS Tribution CHIRD STAT ciuitati terrae eere baden e ertet 276 CAL Culate lt n DISTribution CHIRp TIMilig cua 22er cerei e vaa nii 276 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP FREQuency esses nennen rere 277 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP PHASe sss eene nennen rers 277 CAL Culatesn gt DIS TributionTHOPPPOW E 278 CALCu late lt sn gt DI STibuton HOP STATE iorsin erri ride aid ue a e EEN coa cuc ra Fas i coda 279 GALCulate n DISTrbuttor HOP ZTIMIBG s uiris tr em SES Seed eg 279 cCALCulatespmsbDISTrib tlonNBINS EE 280 TEE EN Neel corri etva dead ci fa xuo teda a ero Te sera veau ede d Pe c p adve TN 280 CAL COulatesns DIS DUDUHOPIY EE 2
101. for the hop switching time from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Information on Detected Chirps The following commands return information on the currently selected or all detected chirps CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults 0 6 0 c c ccccceeceeceeececnenesecsbanecseceebeneeetdtees 351 CAL Culate lt n gt CHRDetection TOT CT KEE 353 SENSE ICHIR FRE Ouen y e KEE 353 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm AVERage esses nennen nnne 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum eeseees ese esee 354 ISENSe CHIRp IFREQuency AVGFm MINIRIUIIT iii ioc iter rro ea eor tirar to 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation eeseeseeeeeeeen nene 354 SENS ICHIRG Ge E e EE 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQu ency CHER AVERA enne 354 SENSE CHIRp FREQuency CHERror M ANlmum ANNER 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MINimum esee enne nennen 355 SENS amp e CHIRp FREQuency CHERror SDEVIiatlon anoche etae antc nn n tata 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQ enecy 2 eicceciniaiessee a A Sha edes Y redeo Pe Rage 355 IGENGelCHiRp FREOuencv FREOuencv AVERage nnne nnns 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum eeeeeeee eene enne nene 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQu
102. from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Signal Description The Signal Description settings provide information on the expected signal which can improve measurement and analysis e Signal MOUbl E 70 LEE CIS KETTEN 71 LAEDIT 75 Signal Model The signal model defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed From the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Model tab Hop Model Chirp Model Defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method 6 2 2 Signal Description These settings are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed For more information see chapter 4 3 Signal Models on page 19 Hop Model Signals hop between random carrier frequencies in short intervals Chirp Model The carrier frequency is either increased or decreased linearly over time Remote command SENSe SIGNal MODel on page 224 Signal States The nominal frequencies or chirps the signal is expected to switch to are defined in advance in the Signal State table Each possible frequency chirp i
103. gt If enabled the hop state frequency parameter is included in the result tables see State parameters on page 45 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling GHZ MHZ KHZ HZ Defines the scaling for the frequency parameters Manual operation See State Frequency Nominal on page 46 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing ALL STATe lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled all timing parameters are included in the result tables see Timing parame ters on page 45 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt RST ON Setting parameters lt Scaling gt S MS US NS Defines the scaling for the timing parameters Usage Setting only Manual operation See Timing parameters on page 45 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing BEGin lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing DWELI lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing SWITching lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled the specified tTime parameter is included in the result tables see Timing parameters on page 45 Note that only the
104. gt REFResh on page 246 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 246 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels GALOGulate n MSRA ALINe SHQONW 2 ici ire eterne an a Re ea a E Re arn RE RR Ida RA SEENEN 327 CAL Culate nzMSbRA AL INelVAl ue 328 CALCulatesmnxMSRAWINDOWSHBSMALS9 desee ttt enata v ene tta dense td exo rueda diim tine 328 SENSe IMSRA GAP T te OFF Sel reete reise td amr otia dnce edv ove dades 328 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default u
105. gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 146 See Marker Type on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters Trace Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example
106. include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first UO Data File Format iq tar Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files UO parameter XML file e g xyz cm Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an ig tar file UO data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary I Q data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file UO preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open Joar xml file in web browser xslt A 2 4 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema
107. inr EE n DID dus 89 Seel IL 89 DEE ME 89 BIST CT TT T MTM 89 Sed T 89 NOPE 89 ioc 90 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Input Output and Frontend Settings Note When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 special conversion loss tables are required These tables are stored with the file exten sion b2g Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 199 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 197 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against
108. irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Usage Analyzing Transient Effects AVGFm FMERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm RELFrequency FREQuency Average frequency RELFrequency Relative frequency hop to hop FMERror Hop state deviation MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation BEGin BEGin Hop Begin Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP FREQuency X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop frequency parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt Usage AVGFm FMERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm RELFrequency FREQuency Average frequency RELFrequency Relative frequency hop to hop FMERror Hop state deviation MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation Setting only Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate n TRENd HOP FREQuency Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop frequency parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVGFm FMERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm RELFrequency FREQuency Average frequency RELFrequency Relative frequency hop to hop FMERror Hop state deviation MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average
109. m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum ABOWe essen CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELoOw eene CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz GbPECirogoram v MiNmmumNE XT CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MlNimum PEAK esee CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe GALGulate n DELTamarkersm X certet heben ENESE EEN EEN CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt X RELALIVE ensisi irnar peer nhe e EY Eo ERR ERR 311 eeu rebat cases 312 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp FIREQUehty rnnt inter tret t entr ario 274 CALCulatesn DISTribution e ele 275 GALGulate n DISTribution e el leie Ge 275 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp STAT6 1i rethorica nh terrre rir tina 276 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp TIMing ve E GALGulate n DISTrib tion HOP FREQUENCY SNE t rrr nr n rne rn merecen eren 277 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP PFIASe ra rrr rr trennt n rero the eerie CALCulatesn DISTrib tion HOR ocean exert tnra repre Evan ERO EO HEC ER eH YE epe ne ANRT CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP STATe eh CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP TIMing 1c n eere t ene tere ent creen iere nons Ee ER Net en TE E CALGulatesn DIS TnbUtiOn AC 280 GALGulate n DISTribution e 280 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection DWELI AUTO CALCu
110. me 119 Display Configuratlon rnnt enint neni iin neri linen ATENE 119 Result Configuration eei tnese eo ctmeeis entities suia rir rsen anni ri Ran Reainis 119 Evaluation Basis niece eee retentis tese siii ria dec ERASE EARE 129 jiu 130 Trace Data Export Configuration eeeeeeeeeseeeeeenennenennnnnn nnne nnns 133 Spectrogram Settings riii nee oe erneuert ecce niani iirerni n 135 Export FurictlOns tiere nine rnia aun pa nara REEIR E XXE RR ERR Rua SERRA M EARRR nux 142 Marker Settings iine nire netten nil ese nere o ten sue si addas ne aiii rin naei uda 144 Zoom F nctions iioii irit etie trier aia tei ir iie SANEREN ERNAS 153 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Modee eene nennen nennen nennen 155 How to Perform Transient Analysis eene 157 How to Configure the Color Mapping eene m nn 161 How to Export Table Data rerit ro Reni PPAR T PARRRRERERRRARR RARE ERR RRRRRKRARKAAE 164 Measurement Exampl s puete getest raum ncn nemo Geste 166 Example Hopped FM SGional ee 166 Example Chirped FM Signal eeseeeeeseeseesseesees enne nennen 171 Optimizing and Troubleshooting eeeeeeee 177 Remote Commands to Perform T
111. measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the maximum hop power from the Results table for the specified hop s Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Maximum Power on page 50 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the maximum power from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP POWer MINPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the minimum hop power from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Minimum Power on page 50 See Power Ripple on page 50 SENSe HOP POWer MINPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer MINPower
112. measurement is stopped While the measurement is running the RUN SINGLE key is highlighted To abort the measurement press the RUN SINGLE key again The key is no longer high lighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps or calculate chirp statistics on the Traces tab see chapter 7 4 Trace Settings on page 130 e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab see chapter 7 8 Marker Settings on page 144 e Configure the Spectrogram display or FFT parameters on the Spectrogram tab see chapter 7 6 Spectrogram Settings on page 135 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK 8 1 How to Configure the Color Mapping The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs How to Configure the Color Mapping The settings for color mapping are defined in the Color Mapping dialog box To dis play this dialog box do one of the following e Select the color map in the spectrogram display e Select the Color M
113. n CHRDetection POWer OFFSet END 2 crt te rnc i eases CAL Culate nz CHb Detechhon POWerRtterence AAA CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection SELected A CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes AUTO zi CAL Culate nz CHb Deiechon GTATesNUlMber AAA 227 CAL Culate cnz CHbDetechonGTATes AB el OAI 227 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes TABLE SAVE cc ccceccceceeeneeeceeeeeesesaeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeeaeeesenaeeesenaeeeseaees 227 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATeES DATA scsccscesseacsasssecesecesssensctersecdveceseceessesezsecersceoeconsnttactessuteveedesbacsns 226 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe COLumn CAL Culate nz CHb Detechon TABletROuencv AL UTSTATel eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeee 264 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency AVGEFm sess rennen nennen CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency CHERTor essent CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency FREQuency CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXVFm essent enne ener enr ennn nen CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSFm sese eren rennen CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe ALLSTATE enne CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLebHAGe AVGbm inneren nennt nnrnn nen thn nene nnn nna CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe PHASe MAXPm CAL Culate nz CHb Detechhon TABlebHAGehRMzbm enne nennen thn nennen enne CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe
114. n Mns 329 CALGulatesn gt ANER E ER E 329 CAL Culat sn RIMS WINDOWSIFIVALE 0 ot eius ra coria etra orte oae rentre erbe conne ena ner Or Oe rae aea 330 GAL Culate lt n gt SGRam er TEE 301 CAL Culate cnz GGbamlSbtcCooram ERAMeCOUND AAA 365 CALCulat sn gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAME GE ect 301 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram HDEPth CALGulatesns SGRam SPECtrogram TRESOlUti fi 2 11r tbe repere retirer Etapas 302 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO essen 303 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATAQ sessi 303 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe CAL Culat sn gt TRENd GHIRD FREGQUGFIC rnnt rri rtt coy conconsensgeneaveuncene nine neaseuieos cen HF HER o eye RC ERES GALGulate n TRENd CHIRp F REQuUerICy X cetero nn ert teeth tenor hn rn a ERR n 283 CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp FREQuUue nOy Y irte titt rn trn iN ENEAN tho rr dian 283 CALCGulatesn TRENG CHIRP e 283 GALGulate n TRENd GHIRp PHASe X neto rre rre enne rin ert ten Tre doa 284 CALCulatesn gt elle e EE 284 CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp POWer CALCulatesn gt TRENG CHIRDIPOWeCriX cists Sege EES dE EE 285 CALCulatesn2 TRENG CHIRD PONWOF EE 285 CALEGulatesn TRENG CHIRD STATG utet cct metet tens ete eat teens cese etn cea 286 CALCulatesn gt TRENG CHIRD S EC 286 CALCulat sn gt TRENG CHIRP STATE EE 286 CALGulatesn Nee e lee GR e DE 287 CAL
115. n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 315 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 315 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 316 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 316 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 317 7 9 Zoom Functions Access Zoom icons in toolbar NHS NN ME 153 Multiple ZOOM M Creare a aaaea errs erer E rarer cern rer reer pret rr ree 153 Restore Original Display rte rette remet uL xs d nne NEES 154 EE NR RES 154 E ro m T 154 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 154 Single Zoom R A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 326 DISPlay WINDowcn Z0OM AREA on page 325 Multiple Zoom Ba In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn 200M MULTiple zoom STATe on page 327 DISPlay
116. on the same data analysis region or hop chirp are updated Currently this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application Tip result tables are also re evaluated for each data zoom which may take some time Close the result tables during a data shift zoom to improve the screen update speed After selecting the Data Zoom s function pinch or spread the area in the result dis play to zoom into or out of the data base When the required data base is evaluated select the Deactivating Zoom Selection mode R to return to normal touchscreen behaviour For more information see chapter 4 6 Zooming and Shifting Results on page 26 X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 326 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 327 for each multiple zoom window 7 10 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA MSRT Master can be analyzed in the Transi ent Analysis application The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA MSRT mode are those descri bed for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA MSRT applications
117. page 110 Adjusting Settings Automatically The following remote commands are required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment SENSE RT El cis inr esee eee ete ne canted Patna ETE SE end 242 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small 11 5 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 118 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps When you activate a Real Time Spectrum measurement channel a measurement is started immediately with the default settings However you can start and stop new measurements at any time Capturing data in MSRA MSRT mode In MSRA MSRT mode UO data from the input signal is captured and stored by the MSRA MSRT Master For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Useful commands for configuring and performing sweeps described elsewhere SENSe MTIMe on page 222
118. ret iaa Rer LS ED EYE X DUROS Spectrograms remote control tye ici RT Step size remote control AA Table Zieser eoe Table evaluation method sssssss Table remote control sseesessss Type z ANGUS n nn E S AEE Maximizing Windows remote eene dicii ia 250 Measurement bandwidth Data acquisition co icti 108 112 Measurement channel Creating remote sese 184 Deleting remote AA 184 Querying remote Renaming remote sese Replacing remote aiseanna Measurement examples Chitped sigtial i ceti ie nen ee 171 HHopped sighal cer intet te Nha eet e tenes 166 Result range ad Trace averagilig senatore te o eR ex n RE 174 VIE 169 Measurement points Trace detecltot ite emeret cota 29 Measurement range sssessssssseseseeeeeeeneentnnnn 43 Eri IM 27 Configuring i 113 3o M M 28 Length 4115 UII 115 Parameters 27 28 Ee 114 Remote 2299 VS result rahze EE 28 Measurement time 109 113 117 Minimum 4152 Marker positioning a 152 Dm 153 Mixer Type External Mixet 22 toaster 82 MKR K Y 144 MKR gt KO Y MSRA FOI CI M M Analysis inte
119. settings affect the signal power or error levels To configure the amplitude settings do one of the following Select Input Frontend from the Overview then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Amplitude 13 25 Gt Meas Time 350 p Model t L4 mm He o y e d EE MAR 238 Eden Om ben Amplitude Scale Units Reference Level Input Settings Preamplifier Value Input Coupling Offset Impedance RF Attenuation Electronic Attenuation i State Mode Value Note that amplitude settings are not window specific as opposed to the scaling and unit settings Reference LOVE ERR 95 L Shifting the Display Offset 96 Ee E BEE 96 L Attenuation Mode Valls scs cesi eisdieco memet car trn tcrra nk ica 96 Using Electronic AtlenUatiOn ue ee leen ceei eee ntene cete tte epp nna p pn tede oat ECKE 96 peres E E M 97 L Preamplifier sesceeseeeeeettt tnter netten tette 97 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display Input Output and Frontend Settings The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set
120. shorter the time span used for each FFT the shorter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes In Auto mode the optimal resolution is determined automatically according to the data acquisition settings 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings In Manual mode you must define the time resolution in seconds Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO on page 303 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution on page 302 Measurement Time The measurement time and Record Length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured The maximum measurement time in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the measurement time and thus reducing the available memory space may restrict the number of measurement channels that can be activa ted simultaneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe MTIMe on page 222 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings For some frequency phase or power calculations it may be useful not to take the entire dwell time of the hop or length of the chirp into consideration but only a certain range within the dwell time length Thus it is possible to eliminate settling effects for instance For such cases a measurement range can be defined for power and fre quency phase results in relation
121. sured signal results Dwell Time Conditions The dwell time is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal hop frequency or in other words the duration of a hop from beginning to end In a default measurement useful dwell times for the current measurement are determined auto matically However you can define minimum or maximum dwell times or both man ually in order to detect only specific hops for example Frequency Chirping Frequency chirping is similar to hopping however instead of switching to discrete fre quencies the frequency varies with time at a particular chirp rate Transient analysis with the R amp S FSW application and the additional R amp S FSW K60C option is restricted to the commonly used inear FM chirp signals In this case the nominal chirp switches to discrete values referred to as the chirp states 2 Full Spectrogram L CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 4 6 Typical spectrogram of a chirped signal 4 3 3 4 4 Basis of Evaluation The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application can automatically detect chirps in a mea sured signal and determine characteristic chirp parameters Both pulsed and continu ous wave chirp signals can be analyzed Obviously if you consider the chirps rather than the individual frequencies the mea sured data from chirped signals is very similar to hopped signals and thus the analysis tasks and the characteristic parameters a
122. that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Setting parameters File path and file name Example MMEM STOR TA MEAS C R_S userdata MyMeas csv Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Usage Setting only MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 135 Retrieving Resul
123. the Measurement button and in the Frequency Phase and Power sub tabs define which parts of the chirp will be considered when calculating frequency phase and power parameters 7 f necessary filter out unwanted signals using an FM video filter in the BW set tings 8 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 see chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 119 10 11 12 13 How to Configure the Color Mapping Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Select the Result Config button and configure the data basis for evaluation and display e Inthe Result Range tab define the area of the chirp to be analyzed in the result display Define the area by a reference point a length and its alignment in relation to the chirp s center or edges See chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 120 e Inthe Table Config tab define which parameters are to be displayed in the chirp result tables e Inthe Parameters tab define parameters for which a trend or distribution is to be displayed e Inthe Scale and Units tabs configure the value range for the y axis in the individual result displays See chapter 7 2 4 Y Axis Scaling on page 126 To start the measurement select one of the following e RUN SINGLE key e Single Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu The defined number of sweeps are performed then the
124. the IF output of the R amp S FSW The IF fre quency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz Configuring Transient Analysis Manual operation See IF Wide Out Frequency on page 99 11 4 2 Frequency ISENSe FREQuency GENTE didi eruere rene tee pate aiad naiaiaee ipada a di ni iii inei 210 SENSEI FREQUSNCV GENTO STEP onena aa EN A EAEE 210 SENSe FREQUsncy DFFSel 2 eror ero tenes erect rl NENNEN 211 qu SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 94 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX R
125. the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 211 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 212 RF Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current referen
126. tolerance area of a nominal chirp Default unit ms lt Length gt The duration of a chirp from begin to end that is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal chirp Default unit ms lt CRate gt Derivative of the FM vs time trace within the frequency measure ment range Default unit KHZ us lt CRateDev gt Deviation of the detected chirp rate from the nominal chirp state in kHZ us For details see Chirp State Deviation on page 53 Default unit KHz us Retrieving Results lt FreqAvg gt Average frequency measured within the frequency measure ment range of the chirp Default unit kHz lt FMDevMax gt Maximum deviation of the chirp frequency from the nominal chirp frequency as defined in the Chirp States table The devi ation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Frequency Deviation Peak on page 54 Default unit kHz lt FMDevRMS gt RMS deviation of the chirp frequency from the nominal linear chirp frequency as defined in the Chirp States table The devi ation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Frequency Deviation RMS on page 54 Default unit kHz lt FMDevAvg gt Average deviation of the chirp frequency from the nominal lin ear chirp frequency as defined in the Chirp States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Fre
127. type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 Q Data File Format iq tar I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 O 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 QI01 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 0 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 TILLY Olly iy Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 215 QGI2 TE Channel 2 Complex sa
128. us 5 Hop Results Owell Switching State Avg Hop State Relative Freq Dev ime Time Frequency Frequency Deviation Frequency Peak kHz kHz m SH State i ms ms kHz kHz kHz Index 6 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored background of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA MSRT operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Channel bar information In the Transient Analysis application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings SSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 12 Understanding the Display Information Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the Transient Analysis application Ref Level Reference level Att RF attenuation Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Meas BW Measurement bandwidth Meas Time Measurement time data acquisition time Sample Rate Sample rate Model Signal model hop chirp or no
129. wie 302 Expottinig WEE 144 lw 79 Input file remote InipuE files 1 dro cattaaenneivedecdees UO Power Mee S 104 Trigger level remote sees 217 IF frequency euo ge 98 Output remote 209 IF Out Frequency 4 099 IF output 4 98 scio genienean taena harien ie 209 IF Power Ma ayaa iaei 103 Trigger level remote sese 217 IF VIDEO DEMOD OUTPUT e K eles 99 Impedance Remote Setting Importing e Til 142 edo F 1 T cca wet E E E EAEE 382 Input EE 90 Configuration 76 Configuration remote 187 Coupling A Coupling remote diiseni in i 188 ee EIER UE 79 Overload 98 Overload remote 188 piger 77 Settings nes 76 97 Signal pararmieters 5 eoe reper ette enis 38 Source Configuration softkey ssss 76 Source Configuration Softkey ssse 76 Input sources ek ETC EE UO data file remote UO data files Radio frequency etre ee en Input Frontend ecl eiaa 76 InstallatiOn rrt t rte tetra 11 K Keys LINES not Used uet ette n rp 68 l c M 144 MKR gt ripen eene 149 152 MKR FUNCT not used ss 68 Peak Seane EE 152 RUN CONT reo t
130. 1 5 1 5 2 5 3 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Contents roro 7 LGPRIUSUCNICNUICEU 7 Documentation OverviQw niieienen esee nnne EENEN nnne TAARE R NONNE NEVESSEN ERSS 8 Conventions Used in the Documentation eee 9 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Application 11 Starting the Transient Analysis Application eeeeeeennnn 11 Understanding the Display Information eee 12 About Transient AmalySis ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 MGASUIEINGME BASICS m 16 BEES CDLLJM 16 Signal Processing 2 ioter tenete ccena noce trance tan nnn ceca EEEN 16 ZI GEB 19 LFIPIH2l i M 22 ULIS ECen 23 Zooming and Shifting Results eese ener nnne nnn nnn 26 Measurement Rangjg 2ceiecen tee cc ee ratu conan nnnu auno nns n a acp RNEER NEEN PYTA SONEN aR a Diana nn 27 Trace Evaluation 28 Working with Spectrograms eese nennen nnne nnne nennen nnn nennen 33 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output
131. 264 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechonTAPBlebHAGe AvVGbm nennen 265 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe PHASe MAXPm esses nnne 265 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe PHASe RMSPm sss eene 265 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechion AB ebOuWer ALLTSGSTATel renerne eeerererererersreenee 265 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer AVEPOWED enne 265 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer MAXPOWED eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaasaaeaeenenenes 265 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer MINPoOwWwer sees 266 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe POWer PWRRipple eese 266 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechonTAPBlezfAatelNien nennen 266 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechion AB eTlMing AL LTSTATel en ennenen eresesrsrerse 266 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechon TABleTilMimng BEGim eere 266 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe TIMing LENGth eese 266 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection AB eTiMingobRATE nne 266 CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe COLumn State Headers This command enables or disables columns in all chirp results and statistics tables Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF Enables or disables all subsequently listed headers ON Provides results for the defined Headers only OFF Provides results for all table parameters except the s
132. 299 Export format in na aa 123 134 143 Exporting 133 134 135 143 164 Exporting results remote 368 OIG iae 192 Mode sie 191 Mode remote tc ect iet eire ee ones 298 Retrieving remote A 365 Selecting si 131 Euer 32 Settings remote control 297 SUAUSTICS M 132 Transient Analysis Megle goe 11 Trigger Drop2Ouit Lu 105 External remote aee 218 Eliette ee 106 Hysteresis 106 pour 105 Output 99 106 Remote coritrol 2 nee eres 214 SIOPE e 105 217 Trigger level ntt eee ern reno 104 External trigger remote A 216 UO Power remote 25 217 IF Power remote 217 RF Power remote s214 Trigger source 102 External 103 External CH rir eres 103 Free Run 103 UO Power 104 IF Power 103 RF Power 104 Trigger Gate Configuration Softkey sese 100 Triggers MSRA MSRT secret hee aedes 102 214 Troubleshooting Input overload rires 188 U Units COMMQUIING MERERI ETE 128 Phase isiin 25129 Reference level iusso eee antice DN eo 95 Updating Result display d escort cir enit e ex eta efe Ris Result display remote zii Re E TE V Kit de Lu TI 98 209 Ww Window functions see FFT window functions sueesssss 17 112 Window title bar informati
133. 3 pdev k frequency meas range 4 odev avg for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe AVGPm on page 271 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm on page 340 Power parameters Hop power parameters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer ALL STATe on page 271 Hop Parameters Minimum Power Power parameters Minimum power level measured during a hop Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range settings see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer MINPower on page 272 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP POWer MINPower on page 344 Maximum Power Power parameters Maximum power level measured during a hop Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range settings see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer MAXPower on page 272 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower on page 343 Average Pow
134. 324 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT on page 320 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT on page 324 Marker Search Type Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram X Search Searches only within the currently selected frame Y Search Searches within all frames but only at the current frequency position XY Search Searches in all frames at all positions Remote command Defined by the search function see chapter 11 6 12 5 Marker Search Spectro grams on page 317 Marker Search Area Defines which frames the search is performed in This function is available for spectrograms only Visible Only the visible frames are searched Memory All frames stored in the memory are searched Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea on page 318 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea on page 322 Marker Settings Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 313 7 8 3 2 Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value These functions are available as softke
135. 5 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the I Q data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData PreviewData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V
136. 5 MMe le TEE 34 Timestamps 95 137 Troubleshooting 22 rto areae eae 177 Value le cdita tees 36 162 Statistics Config latioti itc ntt nett pne 122 Programming example 2 2 nnn nennt 372 Result displays oett eminere 64 lee 132 Statistics table Evaluation basis citer teret een 24 Status registers STAT QUES POW tei det tede 188 Status reporting system isisisi iena asein 372 Step size Markers remote control ssseseees 312 Suffixes COMMON TEE Remote commands Sweep ADOFtilig EE COUNT daten tN Oum tie d du Performing remote a CEET Switching time Beete agedeelt E E oci Hs denen 46 Symbol rate MSRA MSRT mode ee 41 T Tables ele Lee E Configuration remote Exporting 2 2 cnet Time domain results Result displays uice top iei Hr rite bbc sees 57 Time frames Ee En Le etii nnani o eese rabat 35 Ee nl WEE 117 136 een EE 34 Time gate Analysis TeglOft reino cia en gege 110 Timestamps Softkey Spectrogram sess 137 SpectrogramMS minaaa tetanen Tea NE 35 137 Timing Chirp States casir rotor eee bro nat ett MPs 75 HOP EE 75 Trace averaging Measurement example sss 174 Trace points Eco er BASICS NA Configuration Softkey Configuring remote control sssssss 297 Ib cree 29 131 Detector remote control eere
137. 50 See Minimum Power on page 56 See Maximum Power on page 56 See Power Ripple on page 57 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TOTal This command returns the total number of hops found The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt TotalHops gt Usage Query only c SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the average Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Average on page 48 Retrieving Results SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror lt QueryRange gt Returns the frequency deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected
138. 52357 MHz 20 98848513 MHz 21 00940406 MHz 20 38657242 MHz 20 40685060 MHz 20 19997409 MHz 19 98250298 MHz Fig 9 3 Detected hop states To analyze an individual hop 15 02345 kHz 15 04680 kHz 29 03270 kHz 26 85483 kHz 28 84165 kHz 27 04731 kHz 26 97040 kHz 28 80827 kHz 23 14505 kHz 33 70141 kHz 49 94840 kHz 15 00620 kHz More gt gt All detected hops are indicated in the Hop Results Table To analyze an individual hop in detail open a Frequency Deviation display and reduce the spectrogram to a single hop 1 From the Meas Config menu select Display Config 2 Replace the Full Spectrogram display by a Frequency Deviation Time Domain dis play 3 Exit the SmartGrid mode R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples EH 4 Select the Spectrogram display 5 Press the MEAS key then select Hop to restrict the Spectrogram display to a sin gle hop 6 Select Select hop and enter 7 to show the results for the hop number 7 1 Hop Results Hop Dwell Switching Avg Max FM RMS FM Avg FM Begin Time Time Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation Won Cu 0 9 0 002 0 Selected Hop ID Hop State No Index kHz kHz TIS 0 058 4 2 Hop FM Error Time Domain 1 CIES Hop Spectrogram D Fig 9 4 Results for a single hop By default both the Frequency Deviation and the Spectrogram displays show 100 of the dwell time of the selected hop To analyze settling effects using a VBW filter One possibi
139. 54 L Frequency Deviation L veragel tenentes 55 Eltere coe abesset rb dtd eaten nex a deuda peus 55 L Phase Deviation Peak 55 L phase Deviation EEN tte tod tnde onini bd ita dca M escas 55 L Phase Deviation Average essent tnter tn tthtnte tenaces 56 Power parameters t reete sett LEE TE REEL EA Da SERERE EE RR Ld HERR ARA Du RE UR 56 L Minimum eewer E 56 E Maxmur I iaer iep end loans edd ota eredi excl rua add 56 L Average PONE Leod etti pisesetit bs rs ome pipi deba d aptae stt 57 Di 4 550 MMMRIT 57 State parameters Chirp state parameters State Index State parameters The nominal chirps are numbered consecutively in the Chirp States table see chap ter 6 2 2 Signal States on page 71 starting at 0 The state of a detected chirp is defined as the index of the corresponding nominal chirp frequency Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe STATe INDex on page 266 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp STATe on page 362 Timing parameters Chirp timing parameters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing ALL STATe on page 266 Chirp Begin Timing parameters Time offset from the analyis region start at which the signal first enters the tolerance area of a nominal chirp The tolerance area is defined by the settling tolerance above and below the defined nominal chi
140. 7 MSRA MSRT mode reete ina 42 Analysis region 43 BASICS argini eiin ideaa idari aatia 23 Configuring we 24 107 Evaluatior basis nnnm eem nnns 129 Frequency bandwidth ctn 110 Frequency delta oe Frequency span Bu P M Parameters Remote Shifting Time gate Visualizing Forero ASCII trace export erre Asynchronous Data processing ornnes 17 Attention MR M 96 pU 96 Teo 96 Mangel p Slo RC Protective Protective remote Audio signals Output remote cc rotes 98 209 Auto ID External MIXET 55 rite rr ek enean External Mixer Remote control Threshold External Mixer remote control ss Threshold External Mixer AAA Auto level Reference level crece atre eie es SOMKEY reiner ener inre Auto Peak detector Auto KT ue BEE Auto settings Iioc 242 Automatic Configuration sen ec e rir erre iri 118 Average EE ege crecer enr sexe rege ciao 117 133 Average detector ii re reete ere rara rere ran 29 B B2000 Activating Deactivating esses 90 Alignment 5291 Connections 91 Remote commands 204 irc 90 SUC ecco ste 90 Band Conversion loss table cccceeec
141. 80 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp FREQuency lt XAxis gt lt YAxis gt Configures the Parameter Distribution result display for chirp frequency parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt AVGFm CHERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm CHERror Chirp state deviation FREQuency Average frequency MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation Setting parameters lt YAxis gt COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of chirps in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured chirps in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp PHASe XAxis lt YAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Distribution result display for chirp phase parameters over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation Setting parameters Y Axis COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of hops in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured hops in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt Usage Setting only CALCulate n DISTribution CHIRp POWer lt XAxis gt Y Axis Configures the Pa
142. AGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 99 OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW Parameters Source IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which the IF value is provided is defined using the OUTPut IF IFFRequency command IF2 The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz This setting is only available if the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector or the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is available It is automatically set if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active viDeo The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal 200mV is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequen cies at the output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector Manual operation See IF Video Output on page 98 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for
143. ALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection DWEL1 MAXimum on page 228 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection DWEL1 MINimum on page 229 6 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e JEE SONOS rcr rte Lettere O 76 e El EE 93 Anmplitudae SStllhgs EE 95 QUIDUESCHINGS RD 97 6 3 1 Input Source Settings Input source settings can be configured by doing one of the following Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select Input Source Config nthe Overview select Input Frontend Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box e Radio Frequency INPUL EE 76 e Settings for Input from UO Data File 78 se External MIXer Settings s per reti e n cbe eee editt eder ti ha vies 79 e Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 90 6 3 1 1 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is the radio frequency If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Output and Frontend Settings 2 Region FM Time Domain Radio Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer fi Impedance IQ File Direct Path High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector
144. ALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency Th
145. AVGFm SDEViation SENSe ICHIRp EREQuenGCy AVGFIn iit t eerte ee sre rtt nana dane v 353 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror AVERage eese eene thai ai pArA E atia tn dna 354 ISENSe GHIRp FREQuency CHERror MAXIUEm uno ni one oen cett timentes 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERrorMINirmUtm cca tot ttt ee ttt ttn tbe ettet tene 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror SDEViation essen 355 SENSe GHIRp EREQUency nee 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency AVERage7 nr htt rn net Hed en 355 IGENZGe ICHiRo FbREOuencv ER Ouency MAX MUM nennen esent enne 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MINIMUM 0 enne 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency SDEViatior rtt ertt t nere eege 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuenoy SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXEm AVE Rage conu orn pni ntn teh conteasasnenseenernerseeadstenaecenes 356 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXF m MAXimum eee eese eene enne senesi anta tna tinte rata tiani 356 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm MINIMUM vic cicatrices 356 ISENSe GHIRp FREQuency MAXFm SBEVIAtIOn ci utente tta r enans DEE ESTE EENET EEEN 356 SENSe CHIRP FREQuency MAXE KEE 356 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFEm AVERGge rentre retro teint terreni oer Edo es 357 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MINim m nnnc n ttt etate tt ter ag aa ar
146. CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 66 See Marker Position X value on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 245 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 66 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker lt m gt to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operat
147. COMMent ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 199 ISENSeICORbechor CHL DATA 199 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMONIC eene e netten stent ense nns sene 200 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs SENSe CORRGECHON C VIS ELC Cb 201 SENSe CORRSsction CVI SNUMBDALr aiio rne cott tpe ra E ee av pc Eo ce docte pg i ee d 201 SENSE TE eler Gi RRC EE 210 SENSE FREQUENCY CENTOS MEP i 210 SENSe IFREQency OFF Stenas ees Ster net pectet tet cate ee amen te e ce ed pe te oe 211 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGEM MAXIMUIMN KE 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm MINIMUM ele Ecrire e ey dc c reenter 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGEm SDEVIiatlon 2 onere trot tn ka e e ehe Ra Y Ee nk oaa 337 SENSE Ted GT ele RE 336 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERrtot AVERage contient tnn rr p e ro TEE dp Cen dna 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror MAXimum eese eene nne nnne ee neret ennnnin 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror MINimum eene SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror SDEViatiori iiceo not rrr rent rne rer eds 337 SENSe HOP FREQu uency FMEBROE ti rient tratti rhe enero tiv ectes c N e ko ENEE Eii 337 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency AVERage i rre una tre enn reote perti SANSAT n inse 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MAXImuUtm enne tet hane nnn nn n dn dan e Radon 338 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MlINimum
148. CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Hop State Deviation on page 46 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the frequency deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency lt QueryRange gt Returns the average frequency from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Frequency on page 46 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average frequenc
149. Ce t STATe on page 299 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe t commands Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 298 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Detectors perform a data reduction from the swept values to the displayed trace points The detector type determines which of the samples are displayed for each trace point Note The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information in the window title bar by an abbreviation The trace detector can analyze the measured data using various methods Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Positive Peak Determines the largest of all positive peak values from the levels measured at the individual x values which are displayed in one trace point Negative Determines the smallest of all negative peak values from the levels Peak measured at th
150. Ctrogram Y MAXimum BELOW eene 323 CAL Culate nz DEI TamarkercmzGGbam vMAimumNENT 323 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT sse 323 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK eee 324 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooramv MAximumt PEART 324 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz GGbRam vMiNimum ADOVe rnrn renerne 324 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooram v MiNimum AbBOye nenene 324 Analyzing Transient Effects CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGGbam v MiNimum BEI ow 324 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELOwW eese 324 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz GGbam v MiNimum NENT 324 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT eese 324 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbRam vMiNimumtPEART ense eseeereesrerersrsrsrnes 325 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz GbEChrooram v MiNimum PEAK nene neeneneeenee 325 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame The frame is relative to the position of marker 1 The command is available for the spectrogram Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp
151. DD Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 1 LEFT MTAB Query only See RF Spectrum on page 59 See Spectrogram on page 59 See RF Power Time Domain on page 60 See FM Time Domain on page 61 See Frequency Deviation Time Domain on page 61 See PM Time Domain on page 62 See PM Time Domain Wrapped on page 63 See Phase Deviation Time Domain on page 63 See Chirp Rate Time Domain on page 64 See Hop Chirp Results Table on page 64 See Hop Chirp Statistics Table on page 64 See Parameter Distribution on page 65 See Parameter Trend on page 66 See Marker Table on page 66 For a detailed example see chapter 11 11 Programming Examples on page 372 Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for Transient Analysis application Parameter value Window type SGR Spectrogram RFPTime RF Power Time Domain FMTime FM Time Domain FDEViation Frequency Deviation Time Domain PDEViation Phase Deviation Time Domain PDIStribution Parameter Distribution PMTime PM Time Domain PMWRapped PM Time Domain Wrapped PTRend Parameter Trend RFSPectrum RF Spectrum CRTime Chirp Rate Time Domain requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H Analyzing Transient Effects Parameter value Window type MTABle Marker table RTABle Results table STABle Statistics table requires additi
152. DD WINDow on page 251 Frequency Deviation Time Domain Displays the frequency error of the demodulated FM signal versus time This display requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H 2 Region Frequency Deviation Time Domain 1AP Clrw 1001 pts 300 0 us 3 0 ms Note The frequency error is calculated for complete hops chirps only Thus where no complete hops chirps are available gaps will occur in the error display User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 61 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results Re eee 1 Region FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Sh B gd d dB IER IER IER ER 27 a 5 16 8 19 20 0 0s 1001 pts 35 0 us 350 0 us 2 Region Frequency Deviation Time Domain 1AP Clrw 9 10 1 E Hs 8 jg 20 1001 pts 35 0 us 350 0 us Fig 5 6 Frequency Deviation Time Domain display with gaps where no complete chirps are detec ted The Frequency Deviation for the analysis region in the hop model is calculated as fol lows FMerr k FM k Bee hop start k x hop start dwell time Where Le Average frequency estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a hop In the chirp model it is calculated as chirp iength FMerr k FM k d Bee k j e chirp start k chirp start chirp length Where dfayg Average chirp rate estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a chirp rM Average frequency estimate w r t the chirp center obtained from the frequency meas range of a chirp For an ind
153. Detection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt RST ON Usage Setting only Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Power parameters on page 49 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe POWer AVEPower State CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe POWer MAXPower State CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe POWer MINPower State CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe POWer PWRRipple State If enabled the specified power parameter is displayed in the result tables The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Manual operation See Power Ripple on page 50 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe STATe ALL STATe State If enabled all state parameters are included in the result tables see State parame ters on page 45 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Usage Setting only Manual operation See State parameters on page 45 See Frequency parameters on page 46 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe STATe INDex State If enabled the State Index column is displayed in the result tables The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Manual operation See State Index on page 45 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe STATe STAFrequency lt State gt lt Scaling
154. Display iota etre ehh Een ee re een leid 250 Defining the Evaluation Basis sero E 257 Configuring the Result ue EE 258 Selecting the HOP E Ur DEE 261 Table ConnQuratiOn E 261 Configuring Parameter Distribution Displays 274 Configuring Parameter Trends scene eerte tnn enne nnne nta 281 Configuring the Y Axis Scaling and Units seeeeee 295 Meroen c 297 Configuring SpectFOgfalriS cueue cerent ettari tbt tpud edge rea pn ae EE 301 Configuring ber ele CTT 305 Working with Markers Rerotely c rene tacere eoe z eiue 307 Zooming ite the DISPlay t cer Foie it doceat re atico rapa dd ra es 325 11 6 1 11 6 1 1 Analyzing Transient Effects Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e General Window GCombmrarids eiit Peer tenax de rop rea aga td Ro dd 250 e Working with Windows in the Display 251 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application DISPIAW el E PC 250 RE GEET EE 250 RIEGERT Ee E iot rte Ide ate tant ege 251 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING E
155. E SENSe MIXer FEIREQUehcy HAN DOVE Miss cece css nocent eren ate Eg ro sey ERXYE eH eV rap FEE RYE ERN NOH Ke EENES 193 SENSe MIXer FREQuUehCy S TARUO ertr tt rore tern t n nee P e d e LH TENER HR EX ena 193 SENSe MIXer PREQUGNGCY S TOP iiia ocio teas dicerent Er cue EV ae E Ea aea ie diss 193 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet sessi nnennnt tenere nen nnne 193 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BANDENVALUe t cocer ic ehe teet ce cae edo da ed roa 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALuUue esee enne nnne nnns entente nnns SENSe IMIXer HARMoOric EY PE ttn eerte gere teet tet ree Cedo i te ne De Rp e AAE SENSe MIXer HARMonic Ba E ISENSE DI rE OR OW GM T SENSe IMIXer EOSS EH GEL scite e ott eter a e eeepc veta SENSe IMIXer EOSS TABLe HIGLI iui ud n erro nce Er iz c e E E cur Dea d NEA eyed SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW SENSe IMIXer EOSSEBEOW iuter ridet ee verbe vu tt ptio cov tup o goce va ce tpa eee ds SENSe IMIXer el EE Ei E le ee E ER KE ME E SENSe IMIXer SIGN l cereo tertie eer een aanvadey eva fe bc t pp cba Du EI E leg ele ME SENSE D IER E SENSe MSRA GAP Tute OEFSO6L cct tne edd oe b v tpe e RED Eden SENSE RUE SENSE TEE EE SENSE RTMS GAP T re EEN EES SENSe SIGNal MODel SENSE SRAT E SENSe STATiSliC TYPE ettet tire tette v Pe pen ce tp T dete eene
156. EFault eene 305 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer 2222 rre tette ctae tue 306 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe eene eene 306 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer eene ene 306 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe sese 306 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 142 Analyzing Transient Effects DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor LOWer Percentage This command defines the starting point of the color map Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 Example DISP WIND SGR COL LOW 10 Sets the start of the color map to 1096 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 141 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe Shape This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display Parameters Shape Shape of the color curve Range 1 to 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Shape on page 141 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 Example DISP WIND SGR COL
157. EG E INSTrument CREate TEE INS Trument CRE Ate NEW EE INSTr ment BI EE ENT ae BI T2 iion eiie Errata eite pi er rex ar er Ea e Rer bcd eT ce ELEM eer Eve Y EORR ates 185 INS Tr menb RE NAN EE 186 INSTrument SELect LAYout ADD WINDONW tratto tn inerte irte erri e er d env re eo rr nr EYE EUR EE 251 EAYout GATalogL WINDOW P sententia EE E EEEE SUPER COD AEE EEIE TEn 253 heier NEO lo RE 253 LAYout REMove WINDow 254 LAY OuTREPEACE VVIN DOW P 254 LAYON SPLINE D M 254 LEAYout WINDowsn ADDY E 256 EAYOUEWINDOWSM gt IDENUPY 256 LAYoutWINDOowsrn REMOYVO copre Ec ette Let etre ev cat ug ta gis c ipd pa voee teat 256 EAYout WINDowWSr REPLGG recorrer e dette ob oa core rtu sona eb hane nie Fx RM Ted 2X AEAEE MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q COMMent MMEMory STOResn IQ S TAT6 riter iter err ha e cop er RR e E ri e eere b o Ree Eee RENE de er El tee El coerente en rp verba con eb Yee eNO NESTEA Ene aencos con IN FR APEPRE MMEMory STOResn TA MEA Sarreran re ert ree tern rtp gern ER d TX ee te XE Reap a MMEMory STOResn TABLSB irte rri re eer I npa eere Eod ERRARE Er REY tenta FEE Ene EE aia TOTENS MMEMOFY Re RC dro M OUTPUtI e e OUTPut IF SOURce S NN See Ee ee Ge DI e EE OUTPut TRIGgersport lEVel tritt R eere rrr een ce ere E
158. EGulatesns TRENG GCHIRD TIMIEQX nr EE 287 CALCulatesn 2T RENG CHIR ON e E GE 287 GALGulate n TRENd HOP FREQUe6nRC tet tot rtt entr a reri rere ene eg v RR 288 CALCulate lt n gt T RENd HOP FREQUe nCy X crt mr tret tr iN erio ht rese PM paN 289 GAL Culatesm TRENG HOP FREQUENCY Y eontra reae eheu rri nera ee eae eae KO SV NTE Prae no Ene 290 CAEGulatesns TRENG HOP PHASe xe nr ene cep t me eese gud vd c dpt e DA M Re eva ad 290 CALEGulatesns TRENG HOP E EE 290 CALCulate n TRENQ HOP PHASe Y oe CALEGulatesns TRENG HOP POWGE x ctor rtr ec rettet gute ev de pl ne RE arenes CALEGulatesns TRENG HOP POWROEX EE 292 Te EEN e ee EE 292 CAEGulatesns TRENG HOP STATO cicero gene tov eve tetra ten gp e ae cede vtae cese uc EE 292 CALEGulatesr TRENG HOP STATE X rire aeren a sedent eb rd EE e E Ed eap ER c E ud 293 CALCulatesn Een RE 293 CAEGulatesns TRENG HOP TIMibg chance etr t prd re vtpote tette eet aes 293 CALCulatesn gt TRENG HOPSMMING X cente t i er coe ener Rc eer ra coe Eder EO ED EE RE 294 CALCulat sn TRENG HOR TIMING Yosser E pa Eo E TaS NEn STE DEERE 294 CAEGulatesns TRENG SWAP XY econtra e tp ee DU ud Rt e aan EE ee C deu 281 VE Be ENT TEE 281 le Ee ripis 281 CALEGulatesns UNIT ANGLSG 1 2 cioe errat tte c ertt teen et e oc tg c ev va de 295 DIAGnostic SERVICE Ee 208 DISPIay WINDOWS EMAE E 257 DISPlay WINBDOWsris TTRAC
159. Eate NEW on page 184 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt TA Transient Analysis application R amp S FSW K60 11 4 11 4 1 Configuring Transient Analysis SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 70 Configuring Transient Analysis The following commands are required to configure a measurement for transient analy sis et e EE 187 E EE M 210 e Amplitude SSltiltjs tcc enne E d rece tute conn teh ndr Mintel att 211 LEID EEITSTIC OI DI D 1L a NE IE A A a NENS 214 Dt ARCS cs fete nnn aa aa e a aaea a iaai a aaaeaii 221 Se EE ul Le E 223 e Selecting the Signal Model om coemeterio ae LAE 224 e Configuring Signal Deteclioh cite RI etre exte ao Reto 225 e Configuring the Measurement Range 233 e Configuring Dermodulatlon uoce teet ettet tege det edd t ti us 239 e Selecting the Analysis Region enirn tentia trn nan nhan anas 240 e Adjusting Settings Automatically nennen 242 Input Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input source
160. FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Return values State ON 1 Instrument is supported OFF 0 Instrument is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VDEV Usage Query only 11 4 1 5 Configuring Transient Analysis SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware Queries whether the firmware on the connected oscilloscope is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option Return values State ON 1 Firmware is supported OFF 0 Firmware is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VFIR Usage Query only TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling lt CoupType gt Configures the coupling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope Parameters lt CoupType gt Coupling type DC Direct connection with 50 O termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal CDLimit Direct connection with 1 MO termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components RST DC Manual operation See Coupling on page 105 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 4 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 219 RE Ee 208 QUTPUVIF SOURCE TE 209 OUTPULIFARFREGUGNOY coude oe acce ted adbeast ieee a lees ae nested 209 DI
161. FbROuencv REI Freouencv AVERage eren 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency MAXimum e esses 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency MlNimum esses 339 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency SGDEViaton ciiiicrcsiisnasisiiiniiiiiiiiieniinna 339 SENSE HOP FRE Quen y RMSFM KEE 340 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm AVERage eeeeee eene 340 Retrieving Results SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum eieeeee sees 340 ISENZe HOP FREOuencv PRMSEm MiNimum aana anaana 340 ISENZeJHOp FbREOuencv RM SGDEViatton enne 340 IER tee UNT TT 340 EE le Tee E EE 340 SENS amp HOP PHASe AVGPmi AVERRBUS 2 iore tiui emet ER XR XR ER ERRARE 341 SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm MAXimum cesses ENN 341 SENSe HOP PHAS amp AVGPm MINIITBIIm EE 341 SENS amp HOP PHASe AVGPmiSDEVialiori 1 ta totem SEENEN ES et rhe DE 341 SENSeTHOP PHASeIMAXBI iet cents iosi ne patuere draad Ra oRe YE ne pax etna rana re di Yun 341 SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm AVERAQe2 trit et nt ttes e rre d creta rne 341 SENS amp HOP PHASEMAXPmIMAXImUE 122 1 recen panni eda drca rh Lore vio cenas 341 E Elle e e Sen AU e KE 342 ISGENGe IHOp PDHAGe MAN bm GDEVlatton eene nnne nnne 342 SENSE IHOB PHASE RMSP KE 342 IGENZGeIHOp PHAGehRM bm AVERage nennen d N naaa aaa 342 ISGENZGe IHOp PDHAGehRM bm MANimum nnns 342 SENSe HOP PHASE RMSPME MINIMU aad Loc deant Rer esaet t tutt s 342 SENS
162. Frequency Deviation Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP PHASe lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop phase parameters over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Chirp begin Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP PHASe X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop phase parameters Analyzing Transient Effects The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation Usage Setting only CALCulate n TRENd HOP PHASe Y Y Axis Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop phase parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP POWer lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop trends over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVGPower MAX
163. Full Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be captured AR Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be analyzed AR Delta Frequency the offset from the center frequency AR Time Gate Length the absolute length of the time gate AR Time Gate Start the starting point of the time span for analysis Optionally you can link the size of the analysis region to the size of the full capture buffer Select the Measurement button and in the Frequency Phase and Power tabs define which parts of the hop will be considered when calculating frequency phase and power parameters If necessary filter out unwanted signals using an FM video filter in the BW set tings Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 see chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 119 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again Select the Result Config button and configure the data basis for evaluation and display e Inthe Result Range tab define the area of the hop to be analyzed in the result display Define the area by a reference point a length and its alignment in relation to the hop s center or edges See chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 120 e Inthe Table Config tab define which parameters are to be displayed in the hop result tables e Inthe Pa
164. ILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 78 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 11 4 1 2 Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 77 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input or file input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector FIQ IO data file selected by INPut FILE PATH on page 204 For details see chapter 4 10 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 39 RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 77 See I Q Input File State on page 79 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be install
165. LUNKTOMAbkercmz enhn ss nn sns en iiis 308 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe esses ener rere het h inet 308 CALECulatesmnMARKersm s TRAC Gi opiaat aada a aaia a aida a a EEA 308 GAL Gulate mMARKerspmis Aer de EES EE 309 CAL Culate nz MAkercnmzsN sense ntsssa isses iis rnaen an ankn ian 309 CAL Culatesm DELTeamarkersm NOEF at oce dia en rre tee cereo turco nen cubre Rd binas 310 GAEGulate ms DELTaimarkeremcodL INK 3 2 120r II vinee d Peor rto rok N pe RE 310 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TOMAbkercmz senes nnne 310 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz ME 310 CALCulatesn DELTamarkersmP S EATe duree idt intet opa a adia 311 CAL Gulate ns DELTatriarker mo TRA GQe 7 d eei fess seed EENS NEEN 311 Analyzing Transient Effects CAL Culatesm DEL TarmafkersmmsoX dec rueda vnu tex Don ede ev ad ya arta Da a eat ea De des ny aaa ded Es 311 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative esses nnne nnn nnn 311 GAL GulatesmDELETAmatkerem tY EE 312 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt lt State gt This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1
166. MAXimum lt QueryRange gt Retrieving Results SENSe HOP POWer MINPower MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer MINPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the minimum power from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple lt QueryRange gt Returns the ripple power from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the ripple power from the statistics table for the speci fied hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP STATe INDex lt QueryRange gt Returns the hop states from the Results table for the specified hop s Retrieving Results Query parameters lt
167. Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode Example INITiate SYNC Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements This remote control command requests the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application option to wait until any auto refresh operation is finished However it does not initiate a refresh itself An auto refresh is performed automatically after a configuration parameter is changed that requires the results and displays to be re calculated Note that hardware changes require a new sweep to be performed not just an auto refresh This command can be issued at any time but makes sense only in single sweep mode Example Usage INIT IMM WAI R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application
168. N OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 96 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 214 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 96 11 4 4 Configuring Transient Analysis INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 96 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 96 Triggering The follow
169. Nimum Determines the minimum of all values in one sample point SAMPle Selects the last measured value for each sample point RST MAXimum Example SENS SGR DET FUNC SUM Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Detector on page 139 11 6 11 Analyzing Transient Effects SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow LENGth This commands queries the FFT window length Return values lt WindowLength gt 1024 2048 4096 RST 1024 Example SWE FFT WIND LENG Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Usage Query only SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow TYPE lt ColorScheme gt This command queries or sets the FFT windowing function Parameters lt ColorScheme gt BLACkharris CHEByshev FLATtop GAUSsian HAMMing HANNing RECTangular RST BLACkharris Example SWE FFT WIND TYPE BLAC Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See FFT Window on page 112 Configuring Color Maps The color display used in spectrograms is highly configurable to adapt the display to your needs For details see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 16 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor D
170. ON Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes DATA lt FreqOffset gt lt Tolerance gt This command sets and queries the hop state detection table It consists of a comma separated list of value pairs one for each possible hop state A maximum of 1000 states can be defined Note that the state table can only be configured manually if CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes AUTO is OFF The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt FreqOffset gt Frequency offsets from the center frequency Default unit HZ lt Tolerance gt Tolerance above or below the nominal frequency Default unit HZ Example CALC HOPD STAT le6 0 3 le5 0 4 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Frequency Offset Chirp Rate on page 73 See Tolerance on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes NUMBer This command returns the number of hop states in the state table The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt TotalHops gt Range 0 to 1000 Usage Query only Manual operation See Hop Chirp State Index on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe ADD lt start gt step lt number gt This command adds multiple genera
171. OPDetection STATes TABLE STAR eene nennen 232 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLeE STEP ccccccccseeeeeseneeeeeeaeeeceeaeeeseaaeeeseaaeesseneeeesiaeeeeeeeees 232 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes Ab eTOLerance 233 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes DATA CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe COLumn CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency ALL STATE 0 0 ec cece cee eeeeeeee tenes seeeeseeeeeaeeeeeneee 270 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency AVGFm esses eene CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe F REQuency FMERror T CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency FREQuency seen 270 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXFm essent enne nennen 270 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency RELFrequency sese 270 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSFm essent rennen 270 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe PHASe ALL STATe e CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe AVGPnm essere enne ener rennen ia CALCulate n HOPDetection AB ebpHAGeMANbm ener nnnm rennen eren enne CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASE RMSPM 0 0 0 rennen reete nnne CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer ALL STATe CALCulate n HOPDetection AB ebOWer AVE Power CAlCulate nz HObDeiechon TADl ebOWer MAN bower nennen neenneeenrenrennneis CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetectio
172. PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search incl
173. Play WINDowsn TRAGest S TATe iini eren rte ecrire eee ere uerit Rae DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA nnne ennt tenen rnr sert ets sessi nnn rr Earann EEEn Enne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA nennen nennen DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sese nennen nent nnne DlSblavf WiN Dow cnzlkZ0O0OMGTATe eene tnnt nnne eaan anr ninnaa nns innen EXPort WAVeform DISPlayolt entrer re tne ert nd cene E eR e EE an Ex XE d EE E Een pa FORMat DEXPort DSEParator FORMAED ele ERT EE ele elek ll d le ll NIE EH INITiatesmns CONTIDUOLS dite arre Eee rep te sehr nnt nns cl recreate dw i n gt RERRE TREE INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt INiTiate lt sn gt SEQue cer I AE E parceret rtp aec eterne ee cte retos INI Tiatesnz SEQUOnceE le RTE ll EE OR EE ll ME BIEN INPut AT ET LTE Te REES TE AUTO EE INPut ATTenuation PROTecti n RESOL 1 rrt tentent rel cepa rae EEN INPUt GOW zia LEES WIN PUD RAS EE INPUTEAT t eT INPut EATT AUTO ds desire SEA ER INPUCRILE Regie AS INPut FIETeGHPASSES TATe iicet eto herren carter eerte hk rere ever earn rr n erus leuia en dle caELgl e E peacesa deenee INPUEGAIN S PE M INPut GAINEVALUS 5 rrt rte enr Fer ee rr ver Free thi revertere a erri rep re Ea o DR INPut IMPedance as NPU SEL
174. Power MINPower PWRRipple MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power AVGPower Average power PWRRipple Power ripple Analyzing Transient Effects lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Hop Begin Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP POWer X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop power parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt AVGPower MAXPower MINPower PWRRipple MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power AVGPower Average power PWRRipple Power ripple Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP POWer Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop power parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVGPower MAXPower MINPower PWRRipple MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power AVGPower Average power PWRRipple Power ripple Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP STATe lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop trends over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters lt YAxis gt INDex STAFrequency INDex Hop index STAFrequency State frequency nominal lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Hop Begin Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP STATe X lt XAxis gt Configu
175. Programming Example Analyzing Parameter Trends This example demonstrates how to analyze parameter trend for a hopped signal in a remote environment It can be performed subsequently to the measurement described in chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measure ment on page 375 sseseseses ER Adding parameter trend results Result displays upper row 1 RF Power Time Domain full capture 2 Avg Power vs Dwell Time Trend middle row 3 Average Frequency vs Begin Trend 4 RF Spectrum A Region bottom row 5 Hop Results table default 6 Hop Statistics table LAY REPL WIND 2 PTR CALC2 TREN HOP TIM X DWEL CALC2 TREN HOP POW Y AVGP LAY REPL WIND 3 PTR CALC3 TREN HOP FREQ FREQ BEG Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Programming Examples Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieve results for parameter trends CALC2 TREN X CALC2 TREN Y CALC3 TREN X CALC3 TREN Y Reference ASCII File Export Format A Reference A 1 Reference ASCII File Export Format Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other applications The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the trace data Generally the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel
176. Query only Manual operation See Parameter Distribution on page 65 See X Axis on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution Y Queries the y axis values of the specified Parameter Distribution display The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt YAxis gt The number of values is defined by CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution NBINs The used unit depends on the selected parameter Usage Query only 11 6 7 11 6 7 1 Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Parameter Distribution on page 65 See Y Axis on page 124 Configuring Parameter Trends For details on the parameter trend result displays see Parameter Trend on page 66 e General Cormriahnds iessiienieece prre tie ED Ihe AER Reeve 281 e Chit Parameter Trends eei in iene 282 e Hop Parameter Ne E 288 General Commands GAL Culatesn gt TRENA SWAP XY EE 281 er Beitr TRENG CA 281 GAL CulatespmsDRENGOSYUE aviaire ts pocta bd pee ae ex eo utere bd aed dr td dnd ated xad aaa 281 CALCulate lt n gt TRENd SWAP XY Swaps the x and y axis parameters of the Parameter Trend result display The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Swap X and Y Axis on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt TRENd X Queries the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt XAxis gt Usage Query only Manual operation See Param
177. QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See State Index on page 45 SENSe HOP STATe INDex AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe INDex MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe INDex MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe INDex SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the hop states from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency lt QueryRange gt Returns the nominal hop state frequency from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See State Frequency Nominal on page 46 SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency MAXimum lt QueryRange gt Retrieving Results SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the nom
178. QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Dwell Time on page 46 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the hop dwell time from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching lt QueryRange gt Returns the switching time from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Switching Time on page 46 11 9 2 Retrieving Results SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value
179. R amp SSFSW K60 Transient Analysis User Manual OCF 4 0 100 13 Hop Results ID Hop No Meas BW 80 State Index 1175 6478 02 07 Frame Hop Begin ms CF 4 0 1001 Meas ges Dwell Switching Avg Time Time Frequency us ns MH Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000K85 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K60 Transient Analysis 1313 7495 02 e R amp S FSW K60H Transient Hop Measurements 13122 9916 02 R amp S FSW K60C Transient Chirp Measurements 1322 9745 02 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 1
180. RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 212 INPut GAIN VALue on page 212 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 lg pelo MM EE 98 IF Oe Out e He TT 99 NOISE SOURCE Mm 99 Berg EIE 99 e E e TREE TTE 99 Seer ee ener re ere anne etre O 100 Biz d 0 BENIN 100 L Send NE REEL 100 IF Video Output Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and additional information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector IF 2 GHz Out The measured IF value is provided at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output con nector if available at a frequency of 2 GHz If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option is installed and active this is the only option available for IF output When the B2000 option is activated the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ o
181. Rent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 54 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the maximum Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the RMS Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 54 Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the RMS Frequency Deviati
182. S TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 88 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 88 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 89 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileN
183. SCPI parameter to the remote command see chapter 11 6 5 Table Configuration on page 261 and chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Information on Detected Hops on page 331 Hop ID and Hop number Each individual hop can be identified by a timestamp which corresponds to the abso lute time the beginning of the hop was detected In addition each hop is provided with a consecutive number which starts at 1 for each new measurement This is useful to distinguish hops in a measurement quickly Remote command SENSe HOP ID on page 340 SENSe HOP NUMBer on page 343 State lge 45 Bereet m ETT 45 Timing ele sc 45 L Hop Begi eelere ee 45 B o 1 EE 46 L Switching Tee 46 Frequency paramielets eee rn Lee eR Re RR SRRRS HAS aa aA EENS ec 46 L State Frequency Nominalt teneret terere rtrnnartntnte tente 46 Hop Parameters L Average reegen eode onde ee 46 L Hob State Debaten taii reir totae Ae i otn either tacitis 46 L Relative Frequency Hop Zo Hopt tenentes 47 L Frequency Deviation Pesak nen iiia 47 L Frequency Deviation RMS esses tnter nntnte ttes 47 L Frequency Deviation L veragel enne 48 Phase psrameleis ence eoruni dee REENEN e 48 L Phase Deviation Geck 48 L Phase Deviation EMS caeci censa crie teda nk ocn ENNER 49 L Phase Deviation L verage entente tnter tn tthnntetntana 49 Power EE 49 L Minimum PE NM sivasteastancabariuitaidind cas deaseanedd
184. ST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 94 11 4 3 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not O Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application Al results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Note In MSRA MSRT mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master For MSRA MSRT applications only the query command is available Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 94 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 188 INPut IMPedance on page 189 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 295 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelRLEVel rnrn tnn rnnn ene 211 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ueeeesessssese 212 INPUEGAIN S TA TE m
185. Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the CH3 input connector on the oscillo Scope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscilloscope must be used This signal source is only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active see chapter 6 3 1 4 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 on page 90 Note Since the external trigger uses a second channel on the oscilloscope the maxi mum memory size and thus record length available for the input channel 1 is reduced by half For details see the oscilloscope s data sheet and documentation Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 218 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency Trigger Settings For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuati
186. Spectrogram Display Settings Measurement Settings 7 Ki Eedecl ER o Detector Time Resolution Mode Value Continuous Single Sweep Sweep Default AR and Sweep Separator Colors Clear Spectrogram Ee Ce 3 Full Spectrogram t The FFT analysis used to create the spectrogram is configurable in order to improve detection of transient signal effects or minimize the duration of the calculation For details on FFT calculation see chapter 4 2 Signal Processing on page 16 Selec gg a frame e 136 Time Resolution v5 2 5 0082 err Ea hd Eee e at pati de rhe eee peur cedens 137 History Depi o 137 Timestamp EET LU LLL 137 elle E 137 Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep Separator Colors ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeneees 137 L Selecting the Oben o eter cs dara av pta DA nr nid a ta rta 138 M SAN m 138 L Predefined Kn NND m 138 L Defining User specifie Colors sitet trita trasteros dins 138 Restoring Default AR and Sweep Separator Colors cccecceeeeeeeeeeeseeneeneeaeess 139 Biene 139 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT isch 5 retulit au toe c ren cue ec ere 140 single Sweep RUN SINGLE 2 iri rete ue Fita E veal eed aE E SE 140 Gleal Zeg ege ee 140 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the acti
187. States Chirp States table starting at 0 A maximum of 1000 states can be defined The state index of the corresponding nominal frequency level is assigned to each detected hop chirp in the measured signal Remote command CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes NUMBer on page 230 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes NUMBer on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe NSTates on page 231 Frequency Offset Chirp Rate The hop states are defined as frequency offsets from the center frequency Hops are only detected at these frequencies Chirp states are defined as a linear chirp rate Chirps are only detected at these chirp rates Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes DATA on page 226 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes DATA on page 229 Tolerance A tolerance span can be defined to compensate for settling effects in the signal after switching the frequency As long as the deviation remains within the tolerance above or below the nominal frequency the signal state is detected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes DATA on page 226 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes DATA on page 229 Inserting a signal state Inserts an additional signal state before the currently selected state Deleting a signal state Deletes the currently selected signal state Signal Description Clearing the signal state table Deletes all signal states in the signal state table
188. Sweep Pk Clrw CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 2 Spectrogram e LP Clrw CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Span 100 0 MHz Frame 57 3 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Frame Y Value Function Function Result 100 0 MHz 23 57 dBm 14 8687 MHz 22 19 dB 15 1272 MHz 22 02 dB Fig 4 14 Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 Spectrum result display 2 Spectrogram result display 3 Marker list 4 Marker 5 Delta marker 6 Color map 7 Timestamp frame number 8 Current frame indicator For more information about spectrogram configuration see chapter 7 6 Spectrogram Settings on page 135 Remote commands Activating and configuring spectrograms chapter 11 6 10 Configuring Spectrograms on page 301 Storing results MMEMory STORe lt n gt SPECtrogram on page 369 9 UE tege erp bod eec at dex de ead 34 LEE eosdem 35 e Markers in oe eet DEET 38 Time Frames The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically along the y axis Each line or trace of the y axis represents one or more captured measurement and is called a time frame or simply frame As with standard spectrum traces several mea sured values are combined in one measurement point using the selected detector mum PEINE VV RN MCN CN UU SS User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 34 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame nu
189. T eese 320 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK eese 321 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm GbECtrooram v MiNimumt PDEAR eene 321 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a marker on a particular frame Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago Manual operation See Frame for Spectrograms only on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt SearchArea gt viSible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the m
190. T only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 220 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 220 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Settings Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 220 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 220 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to
191. TL 117 Region Analysis Evalu tiori Dasis nter ctt 129 Remote commands Basics ofi Syntax 2225 nee nero 178 Boolean values Capitalization Character data en Data blocks 183 Numeric values Optional keywords Parameters EDD 183 EI c mM ETT 180 Resetting RF input protection ote 38 188 Restoring Channel settings 2 eterni 70 Result configuration TU 119 Result displays 25257 Chirp Rate Time Domain eeseeseesss 64 Chirp Results Table 64 Chirp Statistics 64 Default 98 FM Time Domain 64 Frequency Deviation Time Domain 61 Hop Results Table 64 Hop Statistics 64 Marker table 66 Phase Deviation Time Domain 63 PM Time Domain 62 PM Time Domain Wrapped 63 RF Power Time Domain 60 RF Spectrum 4 59 Spectrogram 4 59 Result range 43 Alignment Configuring aa 120 LON QUA ee 5 121 Measurement example 120 Offset a 121 Reference JS Remote 2 258 e 121 ll EE 26 154 VS measurement range ieri 28 ZOOMING me 26 154 Result tables elle UL ez oro e M 122 Evaluation basis
192. TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 131 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 133 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Parameters Detector APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPle First value detected per trace point AVERage Average RST APEak Analyzing Transient Effects Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 131 SENSe MEASure POINts lt MeasurementPoints gt Defines the maximum number of trace points within a trace Parameters lt MeasurementPoints gt Manual operation See Maximum number of trace points on page 133 SENSe STATistic TYPE lt Statistic Type gt Defines which hops chirps are included in the statistical evaluation Parameters lt Statistic Type gt SELected ALL SELected Only the selected hop chirp from each sweep
193. Type The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 8 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 197 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 81 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second range based on another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 194 Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 82 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 195 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band i
194. Type gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Activating Transient Analysis Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73
195. Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1 CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 2 s Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt and lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible Manual operation See Marker Search Area on page 151 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre quencies Analyzing Transient Effects Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies Usage Ev
196. WINDowcn 200M MULTiple zoom AREA on page 326 Zoom Functions Restore Original Display Restores the original display that is the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer and closes all zoom windows Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 326 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 327 for each multiple zoom window Data Shift Shifts the data to be evaluated in the result display analysis region or hop chirp and re evaluates the new data ALL result displays based on the same data analysis region or hop chirp are updated Currently this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application Tip Result tables are also re evaluated for each data shift which may take some time Close the result tables during a data shift zoom to improve the screen update speed After selecting the Data Shift 4 function swipe the screen in the result display to shift the data base When the required data base is evaluated select the Deactivating Zoom Selection mode KR to return to normal touchscreen behaviour For more information see chapter 4 6 Zooming and Shifting Results on page 26 o Data Zoom Decreases the amount of data to be evaluated in the result display analysis region or hop chirp and re evaluates the new data thus enlarging the display of the remaining data ALL result displays based
197. Wer MINPower MAXimum esses enm 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower MINimum eeeeeeeeeeen enne nennen 361 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower SDEViation cesses 361 SENSeJTGHIRDIPOWSEPMWIRRIDBIES een odo re treten et ee eee ce orent 362 ISENGeJCHiRp POWer PWbRbRipple AVEHage enne ener 362 ISGENGeJCHiRp POWer PDWbRbRipple MAximum eene enne nnne nnns 362 SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple MINIIUETI 2 2 eee cae oun utro n nott ntt 362 ISENGeICHiRp POWer PWhRbRipple GD Vlaton nenne 362 elei 362 IGENZGeICHiRp STATeAvVERage enne nemen nennen nsns nsns nsns n enen tree rein 363 SENS amp CHIRP STA Fe MAXIMUM 22222222 c cer ott ai ha tt ga enr tti HEEN 363 SENSe CHIRDp S TATe MINIImUI 22 coii coo im cci rein eee dec a EENEG 363 SENSeJGHIRp STAT SS DE Vian EE 363 SENS ICHIRG TIMING BEGIN EE 363 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGIP AVERage 212 eoe nec EEN cer a s 363 SENSe CHIRp TIMirig BEEOIE d e EE 363 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin MINimum eese enne 363 GE e eil ne WEEK ET 363 SENSe amp TICPIBp TIMIng E ENEE 364 SENSeJCHIRp TIMing EENGIhrAVERage nerit eet inten Ehe enn nux ee 364 SENSe amp CHIRp TIMIng LENGIhEMAXIFDUFI uua a tne e uten ener 364 ISENS amp OHIRp TIMIngEENGIPDEMINIRIUR 2 1 iid avo cte rarae aieo aa eoo rnb LOSSEN 364 Retrieving Results ISENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGIR SDEVIQUOM 2 32g terae n ttr puente rne 364 E Ee
198. _S userdata HopStates csv 11 4 8 2 Configuring Transient Analysis Usage Setting only Manual operation See Applying changes to the signal state table on page 74 See Saving the signal state table to a file on page 74 Hop States CAL Gulate lt n gt 7H OP Detection DWELIAU TQ 3 2 27 2 3 62 ore toco sa aiii EES ri cared 228 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon DVWELIMANimum eene nennen nnns 228 CALCulate n HOPDetection DWELI MINimUm cesses senem in n 229 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SiTATesAfO an i a Aa O ESE 229 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechion SGTATestDATA nnns 229 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SfATeshNUlMer seen sns nnns an an 230 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SfATesTABleAfn renes nnne nins 230 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SiATesTABlelOAf nennen nnn nans 231 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SiATes AblehGlates senten 231 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SiATes AbleOttzet seen 231 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SiATesTADlebtbDlace eene 231 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLE SAVE eene een nn enn nene 232 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SiATesTABlez Abt sees ense nnns 232 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon SiATesTAblez Eb nennen nnns 232 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes TABLe TOLerance lessen eren 233 CALCulate n HOPDetection DWELI AUTO State This command activates and deactivates the auto dwell setting for hop detection The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF
199. ace and table row by table row If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function the entire histo gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded For large history buffers the export operation may take some time Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 370 7 6 Spectrogram Settings The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here For set tings on color mapping see chapter 7 6 2 Color Map Settings on page 140 e General Spectrogram Gettings eee 135 Ee EE EE 140 7 6 1 General Spectrogram Settings This section describes general settings for spectrogram display They are available when you press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Spectrogram Config softkey Spectrogram Settings Traces 11 Transient Analysis Traces Trace Data Export
200. ained from weighted linear regression of the instantaneous signal phase meas k within the frequency measurement range see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 The peak deviation is thus defined as Jeun Max fdev k for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXFm on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm on page 338 Frequency Deviation RMS Frequency parameters RMS of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace Hop Parameters fdevaus 1 gt fdev k frequency meas range for ke frequency meas range fdev is defined in Frequency Deviation Peak on page 47 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSFm on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm on page 340 Frequency Deviation Average Frequency parameters Average of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace gt fdev k fdev RMS frequency meas range 4 for ke frequency meas range fdev is defined in Frequency Deviation Peak on page 47 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency AVGFm on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm on page 336 Phas
201. al model the frequency bands in which the carrier can be expected are usually known in advance Therefore you can configure condi tions that must apply to the measured signal in order to detect a frequency hop and distinguish it from random spurs or frequency distortions Such conditions can be a fre quency tolerance around a defined nominal value for instance or a minimum or maxi mum dwell time in which the frequency remains steady Settling Tolerance FM vs Time Hop End ae za H Hop Begin K Switching z Time 3 2 2 a v Ej E Dwell Tim 3 20 ES 8 Nominal Hop Freq Time s Fig 4 5 Parameters required to detect hops IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 20 4 3 2 Signal Models Nominal Frequency Values Hop States The nominal frequency values the carrier is expected to hop to are defined in advance Each such level is considered to be a hop state The hop states are defined as frequency offsets from the center frequency A tolerance span can be defined to compensate for settling effects As long as the deviation remains within the tolerance above or below the nominal frequency the hop state is detected The nominal frequency levels are numbered consecutively in the Hop States table see chapter 6 2 2 Signal States on page 71 starting at 0 The state index of the corresponding nominal frequency level is assigned to each detected hop in the mea
202. al number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 385 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed UO Data File Format iq tar Element NumberOfChan nels Description Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 38
203. aling gt If enabled all phase deviation parameters are included in the result tables see Phase parameters on page 48 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling DEG RAD Defines the scaling for the phase parameters Usage Setting only Manual operation See Phase parameters on page 48 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe AVGPm lt Visability gt Scaling CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe MAXPm lt Visability gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe RMSPm lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled the specified phase deviation parameter is included in the result tables see Phase parameters on page 48 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt RST ON Setting parameters lt Scaling gt DEG RAD Defines the scaling for the phase parameters Manual operation See Phase Deviation RMS on page 49 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer ALL STATe State If enabled all power parameters are included in the result tables see Power parame ters on page 49 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt HOP
204. alue occurred RST COUNt CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP TIMing lt XAxis gt lt YAxis gt Configures the Parameter Distribution result display for hop timing parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt BEGin DWELI SWITching Hop parameter to be displayed on the x axis For a description of the available parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 44chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 BEGin Hop begin time DWELI Hop dwell time SWITching Hop switching time Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters Y Axis COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of hops in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured hops in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt Example CALC DIST HOP TIM SWIT COUN CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution NBINs lt bins gt This command sets the number of bins used to calculate the histrogram The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt bins gt Range 1 to 1000 Manual operation See Histogram Bins on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution X Queries the x axis values of the specified Parameter Distribution display The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt XAxis gt The number of values is defined by CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution NBINs The used unit depends on the selected parameter Example CALC DIST X Usage
205. alysis on page 119 7 Result configuration See chapter 7 2 Result Configuration on page 119 8 Display configuration See chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 119 The main configuration settings and dialog boxes are also available via the Meas Con fig menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key 6 2 6 2 1 Signal Description To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab or in the diagram footer of a graphical result display to change a specific setting For step by step instructions on configuring a measurement for Transient Analysis see chapter 8 How to Perform Transient Analysis on page 157 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 187 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window
206. alyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters lt YAxis gt BEGin LENGth RATE BEGin Chirp Begin LENGth Chirp length RATe Chirp rate Example CALC2 TREN CHIR TIM Y BEGin Usage Setting only Hop Parameter Trends CALCulatesn gt TRENG HOPIFRE QUEM CY 12 tta tte ag rrr aa etat e eater dare sds 288 CALGulate snP TRENG IHOP FREQUeBCy X 21 221 212a t trece rtr ee ati Lenta dd ENNEN ENEE 289 GAL CulatesnscTRENdTHOP EREGUSBOySY EE 290 CAL Culate lt n gt TRENG IHOP PHASG narii ia anaa aaia a hk Eiai banan ianei 290 CALCulate lt n gt TRENT HOP PHASE E 290 CALGCulatesn gt TRENG HOP PHASE EE 291 GALGulate n TRENd HOP POWBLr a nanain aaia aa aa 2 eaaa nda haaie biao ra Daran 291 CAL Culatesms TRENGIHOPIPOMGIN EE 292 CALC late a ER HOP e EE 292 GALOulate n TRENG HOP STATe arriere to qtan ero ENEE innen oen RO Rex an aN veda AREAN 292 CAL Culate nz TRENdHOPSTATex nhi ste ntr ssa si sse ii sisse sinis sa ss sedan 293 CAL Gulatesm TRENGGEIOP SSTATGSY EE 293 CAL Culate n TRENGHOP TIMING DEE 293 CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP TIMING X cccececee cece cee ceeea ae ee eee eee teteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeesesanaaaas 294 CALGulatespms FRENG HOP TIMIDGSY eade etui ttt tttm r et eot tet entree netten 294 CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP FREQuency lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop trends over time The suffix lt n gt is
207. ame gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Manual operation See New Table on page 86 See Edit Table on page 86 See File Name on page 87 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 88 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not ret
208. ameter Trend result display for chirp state parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt INDex Chirp state index Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp STATe Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp state parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt INDex Chirp state index Analyzing Transient Effects Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp TIMing lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp trends over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt BEGin LENGth RATE BEGin Chirp Begin LENGth Chirp length RATe Chirp rate lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Chirp Begin Example CALC2 TREN CHIR TIM NUMB LENG Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp TIMing X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp timing parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt BEGin LENGth RATE BEGin Chirp Begin LENGth Chirp length RATe Chirp rate Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp TIMing Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp timing parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant 11 6 7 3 An
209. ameters Columns to Export IEEE AM Table Decimal Separator Point Export Export Table to ASCII File The result tables can be exported either directly in the Table Config dialog box or via the Export function in the Save Recall menu via the toolbar L it nee 123 Decimal Sepalrsltor EE 123 Export Table to ASG MiP ile aie eec taa et enn napa Eo Ett E REX d Fa ir e Rute a ARES 123 Columns to Export Defines which of the result table columns are to be included in the export file Visible Only the currently visible columns in the result display are exported All All columns including currently hidden ones for the result display are exported Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 367 Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 368 Export Table to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected result table in ASCII format DAT to the specified file and directory Note To store the measurement results for all traces and tables in all windows use the Export Trace to ASCII File command in the Save Recall Export menu See also chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 133 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instr
210. an ASCII file MMEM STOR6 TABL ALL C R_S Instr AllStatResults dat 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement This example demonstrates how to perform transient analysis on a hopped signal in a remote environment 99592922222 Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Activate the transient analysis application INST SEL TA fu eremi Configuring the measurement Set the center frequency Programming Examples FREQ CENT 1GHz Configure a power trigger to detect transient power effects TRIG SEQ SOUR IFP TRIG SEQ LEV IFP 50dBm Configure data acquisition for 1 ms in a 80 MHz bandwidth BAND DEM 80MHz SRAT 100 MHz MTIM 5ms RLEN 500000 Configure the expected hop signal manually SIGN MOD HOP CALC HOPD STAT CALC HOPD STAT 5e6 5MHZ 1e6 CALC HOPD STAT DATA 5e 006 CALC HOPD AUTO OFF CALC HOPD MIN 0 0001 CALC HOPD MAX 0 000350 EM AUTO OFF 5MHZ 5e 006 1e 006 5e 006 DWE DWE EM DWE Configure the measurement range Frequency calc cut off 5us at beginning and end of chirp CALC HOPD FREQ REF EDGE CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS BEG 0 000005 CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS END 0 000005 Power calc CA CA cut off 5 at each end of hop LC HOPD POW REF CENT LC HOPD POW LENG 90 Configure t he analysis region analyze 1 ms in 20MHz bandwidth in center CALC AR FREO CALC AR FREO CALC AR TIME CALC AR TIME
211. an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Columns Columns to be stored in file SELected Export only the selected visible table columns ALL Export all table columns all possible measured parameters RST SEL lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file 11 9 5 Retrieving Results Example MMEM STOR1 TABL SEL TEST DAT Stores the selected columns from the result table in window 1 in the file TEST DAT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Columns to Export on page 123 See Export Table to ASCII File on page 123 Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Manual FORMatbDEXPort DSEParal r 2 coenae ete adei et ttd i RE gan ENEE 43 CHEN SR aa TEEN 368 FORMat DEXPON HEADE b s ce ae Rice ene ce re adieu e dite e 368 FORMatDEXPort TR COS ainarra boe yv xus ee ERR 2D SERERE R S RR YER OR RE Y LO d 02 369 MIMEMory S TORSSms SPEGIFOgIS eebe SEENEN SES 369 MMEWMory STORexn TA MEAS esses nennen thtrn rerit tnnt panada nennen 369 MMEMorn STOResn gt Ne EE 370 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format P
212. ant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 127 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Per Division on page 127 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Ref Position on page 128 See Ref Level Positi
213. apping softkey in the Spectrogram menu To select a color scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values gt Inthe Color Mapping dialog box select the option for the color scheme to be used Editing the value range of the color map The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the Color Map ping dialog box To cover the entire measurement value range make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included To ignore noise in a spectrogram for example exclude the lower power levels from the histogram The value range of the color map must cover at least 1096 of the value range on the horizontal axis of the diagram that means the difference between the start and stop values must be at least 1096 The value range can be set numerically or graphically To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders 1 Select and drag the bottom color curve slider indicated by a gray box at the left of the color curve pane to the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping 2 Select and drag the top color curve slider indicated by a gray box at the right of the color curve pane to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping 110dBm 80dBm 60dBm 40dBm How to Configure the Color Mapping To set the value range numerically 1 In the Start field enter the percentage from the left border of the histogram that marks the b
214. arameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 123 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 134 Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 370 Parameters Selection SINGIe Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command is ignored RST SINGIe Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 134 MMEMory STORe lt n gt SPECtrogram lt FileNam
215. at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Parameters lt Length gt Manual operation Data Acquisition Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Pulse length in seconds See Pulse Length on page 100 You must define how much and how data is captured from the input signal Configuring Transient Analysis MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMOd scscscsscssessescscsscssestsssutstsutsesevsesevsnsevssevsnseteseees 222 Cal 222 GENSeTIRLENG tnter tentes tette ttt ttt tents rinne roan 223 Co 223 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod Bandwidth Defines the measurement bandwidth in Hz Note that the sample rate and the measurement bandwidth are interdependent see SENSe SRATe on page 223 For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet Parameters Bandwidth Range 80 Hz to depends on options installed RST maximum allowed Default unit HZ
216. ate n HOPDetection TABLe PHASe MAXPm essent 271 CAL Culate nzHObPDetechonTAPBlebHAGe HRMzbm eene 271 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechion AB ebOuWer ALLTSGSTATel neren en eeerererererersreenn 271 CAL Culate nzHObPDetechon TABlebOMWer AVE bower nnne 272 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer MAXPOWED enne 272 CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABLe POWer MINPoOwer cesses 272 CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABLe POWer PWRRipple essen 272 CAL Culate nzHObPDetechonTAbBleziAteAllSTAaTel rennene eee rereeerereret t 272 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechionTAPBlezfAatelNien nennen 272 CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABLe STATe STAFrequency sese 272 CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABLe TIMing ALL STATe eene 273 CAL Culate nzHObDetechon TABleTilMimng BE Gm 273 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing DWELlI nnne 273 CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABLe TIMing SWlTching essen 273 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe COLumn State Headers This command enables or disables columns in all hop results and statistics tables Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters State ON OFF Enables or disables all subsequently listed headers ON Provides results for the defined Headers only OFF Prov
217. ate deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency lt QueryRange gt Returns theaverage frequency from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Frequency on page 54 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average frequency from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the maximum Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CUR
218. ator aeni tenani aan apanas aaua a apa i aaie aaia a kiada aeai 134 Export Trace ASON FE noenee a anaa 135 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 369 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 368 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 368 Spectrogram Settings Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by tr
219. available in MSRT mode Otherwise you will not obtain useful results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 222 Sample Rate The Measurement Bandwidth and sample rate are interdependent and define the range of data to be captured For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet Remote command SENSe SRATe on page 223 Measurement Time The measurement time and Record Length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured The maximum measurement time in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the measurement time and thus reducing the available memory space may restrict the number of measurement channels that can be activa ted simultaneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe MTIMe on page 222 Record Length The Measurement Time and record length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured The maximum record length in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the record length and thus reducing the available memory space may restrict the number of measurement channels that can be activated simul taneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe RLENgth on page 223 Analy
220. bandwidth and Sample Rate are interdependent and define the range of data to be captured For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet All bandwidth extension options including the 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 are supported Note Data acquisition in MSRT mode By default the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application uses the largest possible measurement bandwidth Depending on which bandwidth extension options are installed if any this may be up to 500 MHz How ever in MSRT mode a maximum of 160 MHz bandwidth is available Thus you must ensure the measurement bandwidth for Transient Analysis is available in MSRT mode Otherwise you will not obtain useful results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 222 FM Video Bandwidth Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals The FM Video Bandwidth is available from the Bandwidth or Span menu Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in 96 of the analysis demodulation band width The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths e None deactivates the FM video bandwidth default Remote command SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE on page 239 Time Resolution The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The
221. ber dcn ex b ERO 112 Measurement le e WEE 112 FM Video Ne Ve ME 112 luuten EE 112 Messutremelhlt TMTIB icr eter tet Pr tet eee tanc eer a et eee eerte a eo E dant 113 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest pos sible bandwidth The resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span see ABW RBW on page 111 For more information see Resolution bandwidth on page 18 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow n RESolution on page 224 ABW RBW The resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected analysis bandwidth ABW The ABW can be the full measurement bandwidth the bandwidth of the analysis region or the length of the result range depending on the evaluation basis of the result display If the ABW is changed the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting defines the coupling ratio Which coupling ratios are available depends on the selected FFT Window For more information see Resolution bandwidth on page 18 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow lt n gt RATio on page 224 Bandwidth Settings FFT Window In the Transient Analysis application you can select one of several FFT window types The following window types are available Blackman Harris Flattop Gauss Rectangular Hanning Hamming Chebyshev Remote command SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow TYPE on page 305 Measurement Bandwidth The measurement
222. better understanding of the required configuration settings RER TE e DEE 16 e Signal Processing eseni eeepc erre deh anadi e Prata coge tu vee 16 E D ER TEE 19 e Basis of Evalualoli ip Epitt ei edu tie dadde s es 22 Analysis Ee Cm 23 e Zooming and Shitting RESUS vice cortice certe bed n reed eth ada eases 26 e Measurement Range pei cet eee EE E ded eda 27 ER e EE 28 e Working with Spectrograms EE 33 e Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 38 e Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode 41 Data Acquisition The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application measures the power of the signal input over time How much data is captured depends on the measurement bandwidth and the measurement time These two values are interdependant and allow you to define the data to be measured using different methods e By defining a bandwidth around the specified center frequency to be measured at a specified sample rate e By defining a time length during which a specified number of samples are mea sured at the specified center frequency Signal Processing The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application measures the power of the signal input over time In order to convert the time domain signal to a frequency spectrum an FFT Fast Fourier Transformation is performed which converts a vector of input values into a discrete spectrum of frequencies The application calculates multiple FFTs per capture by dividing one capture
223. capture is inclu ded in the statistical evaluation ALL All measured hops chirps from each sweep capture are inclu ded in the statistical evaluation Manual operation See Selected Hop Selected Chirp vs All Hops All Chirps on page 132 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver age traces In case of continuous measurement mode the application calculates the moving aver age over the average count In case of single measurement mode the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached 11 6 10 Analyzing Transient Effects Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 117 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements This com mand is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single sweep mode Usage Query only Configuring Spectrograms The remote commands required for the individual settings available for spectrogram displays are described here For color mapping commands see chapter 11 6 11 Con figuring Color Maps on page 305 GALCulatesns S GRamt EE E 301 CAL Culate nz GG
224. cate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState Returns the state of the LAN connection to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Configuring Transient Analysis Return values Color GREEN Connection to the instrument has been established successfully GREY Configuration state unknown for example if you have not yet started transmission RED Connection to the instrument could not be established Check the connection between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo Scope and make sure the IP address of the oscilloscope has been defined see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 207 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC LEDS Result GREEN Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip Address Defines the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW via LAN Note The IP address is maintained after a PRESET and is transferred between appli cations Parameters Address computer name or IP address Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP 192 0 2 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP FSW43 12345 Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 91 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice Queries whether the connected instrument is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 For details see the 2 GHz bandwidth extension basics chapter in the R amp S
225. cation Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Transient Analysis Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics e Inthe Signal Model tab select the Hop signal model e Inthe Signal States tab define the known hop states and the conditions for detection see chapter 6 2 2 Signal States on page 71 To generate multiple regularly spaced hop states easily do the following a In the Signal States tab select More b Define the Start Frequency for the first hop state c Define the Step Size between two hop states d Define the number of hop states to be generated in the No of Steps field e Select Add to Table to add the generated states to the existing table or select Replace Table to overwrite the existing table f Optionally define a Tolerance Value or Frequency Offset or both to all hop states and select Apply to Table to adapt the hop state settings Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency Select the Data Acquisition button to define the Data Acquisition Full and Analy sis Region AR parameters for the input signal In MSRA MSRT mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 11 Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode on page 41 e Full Measurement Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be cap tured 10 11 12
226. ce level It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 212 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 213 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator 6 3 4 Input Output and Frontend Settings In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 213 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to nois
227. ceeeeeseseeeeeeeesseneeeee 88 External Mixer cccccccccssssceceeessssseeeeeeeceesstseeeeeeeeees 81 External Mixer Remote control 193 Bandwidth Coverage MSRA MSRT mode sss 41 Data acquisition sssssssses 108 112 Bias Conversion loss table sesessssssssss 85 88 External MIXGI 5 cra wes csaneuacesenseavensacuseestes conan 84 External Mixer Remote control 191 C Capture offset MSRA MSRT applications sssssss 107 MSRT applications 107 inge 328 330 lod 107 Center frequency 94 Softkey SC e EE 94 Channel bar MTOR le 13 Chirp detection Belle lut e re POWO corre ten enne Measurement example Programming example une ee We WEE Chirp rate Inici came 53 Chirp Rate Time Domain Result diSplays eerte tcrra aere dree 64 Chirp Results Table Result displays estere p aee oro 64 Chirp state Deviation zeie 53 Chirp states PAULO detecto m nnn EE EEEE 73 Basi Ee 21 Chil p Tale red egene 73 ele TU ral ro EE 71 Delti s ng 73 Deteclirig eire ree mrt irae gii 22 plo EE 52 73 Inserting ET 79 Loading 74 Saving 74 Timing e EE ee EE 73 Chirp Statistics Table Result displays rrr s
228. ch con version loss tables will lead to substantial inaccuracy Using no conversion loss tables at all during data acquisition with the B2000 option will cause even more inaccuracy Note that only common conversion loss tables in ac1 files can be edited Special B2000 tables in b2g files can only be imported and deleted For more details see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table New Table Edit Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table New Table Edit Table Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited Input Output and Frontend Settings A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries Table File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Band USER e Mixer Name rs Z60 Harmonic uo 0 LE S N 123 4567 55 00000000000 GHz 75 00000000000 GHz FIS NIMO EET TETTE OTT DET T 87 COO INE cirea eter EU Ee 88 Ballo EE 88 Harmonie Ode ecco eee ege Sue Senegal 88 p E AA AE A E A T n RP 88 Mixer NIME ee t rox eR bre tee a t cad r tee aed a la ea a nd 88 RE 88 MOr TDI ose Re e Rott
229. color set that can be used for the selected object Defining User specific Colors Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep Separa tor Colors In addition to the colors in the predefined color set you can configure a user specific color to be used for the selected object When you select Userdefined Colors the set of predefined colors is replaced by a color palette and color configuration settings Spectrogram Settings Tint Saturation Brightness ARGB The color palette allows you to select the color directly The color settings allow you to define values for tint saturation and brightness Restoring Default AR and Sweep Separator Colors Restores the default colors used to indicate the analysis range and sweep separator lines in spectrograms Detector Defines the detector used to combine overlapping FFT frames for the spectrogram result display Sum Calculates the sum of all values in one sample point Average Calculates the linear average of all values in one sample point RMS Calculates the RMS of all values in one sample point Maximum Determines the largest of all values in one sample point Minimum Determines the minimum of all values in one sample point Sample Selects the last measured value for each sample point Remote command SENSe WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram DETector FUNCtion on page 304 7 6 2 Spectrogram Settings Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running t
230. cted a user defined output with oUT Put TRIGQgereporto OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 99 See Level on page 100 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output 11 4 5 Suffix port Parameters lt OutputType gt Manual operation OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate Configuring Transient Analysis Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice See Output Type on page 99 This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix port Usage Manual operation Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Event See Send Trigger on page 100 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated
231. d MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 370 Trace Export Configuration Opens the Traces dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings See chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 133 UO Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Export Range UO Export Defines the range of the UO data to store Entire Cap The entire capture buffer is exported ture 7 8 Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER key or in the Marker dialog box To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Individual Ee e eerte tee rte ent dae ente Cete tee pe
232. d see B2000 State on page 90 the dis play on the oscilloscope is turned off to improve performance during data export As soon as the R amp S FSW closes the connection to the oscilloscope the display is reacti vated and the oscilloscope can be operated as usual However if the LAN connection is lost for any reason the display of the oscilloscope remains deactivated Use this command to re activate it Parameters lt FastExport gt ON OFF ON Disables the display update for maximum export speed OFF Enables the display update The export is slower RST ON SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe lt State gt Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Option is active OFF 0 Option is disabled RST 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC ON Manual operation See B2000 State on page 90 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe Performs the alignment of the oscilloscope itself and the oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 The correction data for the oscilloscope including the connection cable between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo scope is recorded As a result the state of the alignment is returned Alignme
233. d in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 218 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 216 Trigger Settings Drop Out Time Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger the drop out time defines the width of the robust width trigger By default itis set to 1 us For external triggers no drop out time is available when using the B2000 option For details see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 215 Coupling Trigger Settings If the selected trigger source is IF Power or External CH3 you can configure the cou pling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope This setting is only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension is active see B2000 State on page 90 DC 50 Q Direct connection with 50 O termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal DC 1 MO Direct connection with
234. de reete 64 Chirps Average frequeFiCy i v erit ne aterert 54 Average EE 57 Er M teeeante 21 sel H 52 Detecting PE 22 Display nte ettet me etna 23 Evaluation basis n129 Frequency Deviation Average sssss 55 Frequency Deviation Peak sssessesss 54 Frequency Deviation RMS s es 54 p 4 51 Length usech 2 59 MaximuM POWER cancer throat e rotten titia 56 Measurement range 28 113 MINIMUM POWER inerenti e re ror enn 56 alter Q 51 Parameters ss 22 51 64 Phase Deviation Average sse 56 Phase Deviation Peak ssssssssssess 55 Phase Deviation RMS 4 55 Ripple DOW F 2 erri n etn trente NEEN 57 Selecting er ente eet een 130 Selecting remote sese 261 Signal model Statistics Result display sisii 64 Closing Channels remote iiris 184 Windows remote esee 254 256 Color curve Shape iret oe etu He etes 36 141 Eeer TE EE 36 163 Color mapping jefe e fel 141 Color range 141 142 Color SCHEME cue ertet nre rre 141 Settings remote 305 e 137 Spectrograms 95 137 140 161 162 SEP Dy step eren tee neo 161 Value range nent menn eer pa 36 Color scheme SDeClrOGFari EE 36 141 Colors Assigning to objJect
235. ds to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 5 Data Acquisition on page 221 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the Transient Analysis measurement Useful commands related to MSRT mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 246 INITiate n SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 246 Remote commands exclusive to MSRT applications The following commands are only available for MSRT application channels CAL Culate nzHRIMS AL INe SHOW 329 CALCulatesn RTMS ALING VALUE ciat tet ere ett ee ta 329 CAL Culate nzRTMSWINDowcn NA 330 SENSe RTMS CAPTUure OFFSelt cene leenie etc akuee mic tape ene e Eam desea gae ke ua PER eau Leia 330 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 155 CALCulate lt n
236. dulation Resultdisplays uio foc t trm rti tene e Res 57 Detectors Overview Remote control Spectrogram MACS cas Diagram footer information ener enne 13 Direct path Input configuration Remote deesse tr s Display Configuration softkey scree aaa 119 Elements 4 edito ate tere ha eee dee Coe 12 Drop out time TWIG GE 105 Dwell time SEI M 21 Res lls viscose Secs notai rt ooi etd 46 E Electronic input attenuation rne 96 Errors Jeep E 95 Evaluation Parameter Distribution sisien 65 Parameter Trend 66 Evaluation basis 22 43 Remote 257 Selected hop chirp 432130 Selecting eerte tere rrr een 129 Evaluation methods Er rot dente ru rode ee ta Ceo see o 251 Export format HN Ee c M 380 Exporting Bri 144 FUNCIONS Citt ere i e te Ed 142 UO data me 144 385 Measurement settings sssessssses 134 Table results 122 143 Table results remote 367 Trace datas note tete c De betonte 164 Traces nsus 144 Traces remote 968 External Meer eebe Seeerei a EN Activating remote control sieniin 191 Band 81 193 Basic ne EE 83 Configuration s 9 Conversion loss 482 Conversion loss tables 86 Frequency range w81 Handover frequency
237. e Performing a Basic Transient Analysis Measurement This example demonstrates how to perform a basic transient analysis measurement for an unknown signal in a remote environment dee ees Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Activate the transient analysis application INST SEL TA desees Configuring the measurement Set the center frequency FREQ CENT 1GHz Configure a power trigger to detect transient power effects TRIG SEQ SOUR IFP TRIG SEQ LEV IFP 50dBm Configure data acquisition for 5 ms in a 80 MHz bandwidth BAND DEM 80MHz 11 11 2 Programming Examples MTIM 5ms ees Configuring the results Result displays default upper row 1 RF Spectrum 2 FM Time Domain bottom row 3 Spectrogram 4 RF Power Time Domain Configure RF Power Time Domain automatic scaling DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ON Configure Spectrogram MAX detector GAUSS window function Query number of bins SENS WIND3 SGR DET FUNC MAX SWE FFT WIND TYPE GAUS SWE FFT WIND LENG Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieve trace data for RF Power Time Domain TRAC1 DATA TRACe1 TRAC1 DATA X TRACel Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement This example demonstrates how to perform transient analysis on a chirped signal in a remote environment
238. e Query only Manual operation See Hop Chirp State Index on page 73 See No of States on page 74 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes TABLe OFFSet Offset This command adds an offset to all states in the state table The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Offset Default unit HZ Manual operation See Applying a global frequency offset on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe REPLace lt start gt step lt number gt This command replaces the state table s current states with a new set of generated states The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt start gt HZ The frequency at which the first hop state will be generated Default unit HZ Configuring Transient Analysis step HZ The distance between two hop states Default unit HZ number Number of hop states to be generated Example CALC HOPD STAT TABL REPL 1 MHZ 500 KHZ 10 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Replace Table on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe SAVE Filename Saves the current signal state table configuration to a file for later use The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CALC HOPD STAT TABL SAVE C R_S userdata HopStates csv Usage Setting only Manual operation See Applying changes to the signal state table on page 74
239. e Query only Manual operation See Minimum Power on page 56 SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the Chirp Minimum Power from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple lt QueryRange gt Returns the Chirp Power Ripple from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Power Ripple on page 57 SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer PWRRipple SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the Chirp Power Ripple from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture b
240. e amp HOP PHAS amp eTSMSPm SDEVIAlOFIS acu ere eraut eere a aeu c care Rara ETAT EFE av TA ua er 342 E Ee ee NU MBG cm 343 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPOWer eeeeeseeeeeeeeee eene nennen ener enne nnne nnne nn 343 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPowertAVERage tiere ri aa EEN 343 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MAXimum eeeeeeeeeee nennen mmm 343 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MlINimum eee eene eem 343 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower SDEViation atian nnne 343 ISENSe HOP POWeCMAXPOWOID ure eter Ir Feu a rye anette ee dee eoe ir 343 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower AVERa ge eeeeeeeeeeeee nennen 344 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower MAXimum esses ene eene enne 344 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPowWet MINimtlm intonirana dene ivan 344 SENSe HOP POWer MAXPower SDEViatlon vu NENNEN ENN 344 SENSe HOP POWerMINBOWBEI E 344 SENSe HOP POWer MINPOwer AVERa ge AANEREN NENNEN 344 SENSe HOP POWerMINPowerMAXImmUImIP 12 anniina 344 SENSe HOP POWer MINPower MlNimum e seen mne 345 SENSe HOP POWerMINPower SDEVIialioH irte rar i nett rn n 345 ISENSe HOP POWer PWRRIBDIGS 2 12 crit it rotg uev NEEN 345 SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple AVERage essent enne 345 SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple MAXimum ieeseeeeeeenen eene nennen 345 SENSe HOP POWer PWRRipple MINIIIUTE eicit p tetti eed neni 345 SENSe HOP POWesr PWRRIpp
241. e cad 145 e General Marker Selllh tjs uico dete ee dre e ce a dnte i e cedes 148 e Marker Search Settings and Positioning FUNCTIONS c ccccceeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeenees 149 7 8 1 Marker Settings Individual Marker Setup Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box Mm n vetro dm Frea Meas Time 50 ys t m Markers Marker Settings Search Ref Link to Selected State X Value Marker Marker Trace ieee sim 3 Ful Spectrogram gt Fig 7 2 Marker settings for spectrogram display The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active Selected dz i r M E ES 145 El e 146 Marker Position X value assesses entente nsns 146 Frame for Spactrograms only 1 22 812 eege 146 Makor gor PE 146 Reference Marke 146 Linking to Another E 146 Assigning the Marker to a Traee ice iet eere cocer cae ce 147 el ET 147 All Meant SOM M 147 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Ma
242. e e vas 142 Table Export Conftguraton ennt einen nnne nnns 143 L Columns t BXDODL uiia niue dae te edidic nn e dan 143 L Decimal Separator nter enin 143 L Export Table to ASCII File 143 Export Trace to ASCII Fil iiic trarre tekai pecie rtt eeu ute e epa 143 Trace EXPO del 144 VQ EXPONE M M 144 EE 144 Export Table to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected result table in ASCII format DAT to the specified file and directory Note To store the measurement results for all traces and tables in all windows use the Export Trace to ASCII File command in the Save Recall Export menu See also chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 133 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 367 Export Functions Table Export Configuration Table results can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applicat
243. e front panel When you switch a measurement channel to the Transient Analysis application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel in the Transient Analysis application a Transient measurement for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The Meas Config menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions Automatic refresh of preview and visualization in dialog boxes after configura tion changes The R amp S FSW supports you in finding the correct measurement settings quickly and easily after each change in settings in dialog boxes the preview and visualization areas are updated immediately and automatically to reflect the changes Thus you can see if the setting is appropriate or not before closing the dialog elteren 68 Signal DESCHPUOM Lm 70 Input Owiput and Frontend Settings ceo eel reete ere eerte tete 76 Tiigger Seti EE 100 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region seen 107 Ban width Seiliigs oci ced ette eer eere er ra eda e rv Red 111 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings ccccccsscccccsssssceeesssereeeessesureeeessssureeessesaees 113 FM Video Bandwidth prie ttt
244. e gt This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCII file The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded Note that depending on the size of the history buffer the process of exporting the data can take a while Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SGR Spectrogram Copies the spectrogram data to a file MMEMory STORe lt n gt TA MEAS lt File gt This command stores the current measurement results all enabled traces of all win dows into the specified csv file Retrieving Results The suffix n is irrelevant Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates
245. e history depth Example INIT CONT OFF Stop the continuous sweep CALC SGR FRAM SEL 25 Selects frame number 25 Manual operation See Selecting a frame to display on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram HDEPth History This command defines the number of frames to be stored in the R amp S FSW memory The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Depth Example CALC SGR SPEC 1500 Sets the history depth to 1500 Manual operation See History Depth on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution lt TimeRes gt This command sets the spectrogram time resolution for CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO OFF The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The shorter the time span used for each FFT the shorter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt TimeRes gt The values depend on the evaluation basis of the spectrogram see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt EVAL on page 257 Range full capture area 1 sample rate analysis region or hop chirp 1 sample rate meas bw analysis region bw to full capture area measurement time analysis region time gate length hop chirp result range length RST 0 Manual operation See Time Resolution on page 112 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolut
246. e individual x values which are displayed in one trace point Trace Settings Average Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point To this effect R amp S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detec tion The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divi ded by the number of samples linear average value Each sweep point thus corresponds to the average of the measured values sum med up in the sweep point The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irre spective of the waveform CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Sample Selects the last measured value of the levels measured at the individ ual x values which are displayed in one trace point all other mea sured values for the x axis range are ignored Remote command SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO on page 300 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started again after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Re
247. e parameters Hop phase parameters All hop phase deviation table values are calculated from the time domain result gdev k Qmeas K Pideai k for hop start lt k lt hop start dwell time where Omeas K instantaneous phase of the measured signal Gigea K ideal phase trajectory obtained from weighted linear regression of meas k within the frequency meas range Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe ALL STATe on page 271 Phase Deviation Peak Phase parameters Maximum of Phase Deviation vs Time trace The deviation is calculated within the phase measurement range of the hop see chap ter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 PAEV eck max gdev k Hop Parameters for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe MAXPm on page 271 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm on page 341 Phase Deviation RMS Phase parameters RMS of Phase Deviation vs Time trace 1 3 dev k Qdev gys RMS frequency meas range 4 for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe PHASe RMSPm on page 271 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP PHASe RMSPm on page 342 Phase Deviation Average Phase parameters Average of Phase Deviation vs Time trace 1
248. e ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 214 INPut EATT AUTO on page 214 INPut EATT on page 213 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For information on other input settings see chapter 6 3 1 1 Radio Frequency Input on page 76 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSWS or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The
249. e result displays Capture Buffer 4 MMeasurement Time 1 Capture 9 9 4 Spectrogram Buffer ainjdey au 1ueueunsee A Fig 4 1 Signal processing calculating one spectrogram frame Shortly after the measurement time is over the final results are displayed and the mea surement is complete Due to this asynchronous processing initial analysis results are available very quickly At the same time the data is captured over the full bandwidth entirely without gaps The following figure illustrates how the capture and result display processes are performed asynchronously Signal Processing Measurement Time seconds 100M Capture Buffer Sampled Capture Filling Level 1001 Result Display Buffer Trace Points Result Filling Level Fig 4 2 Asynchronous data processing Multiple spectrograms However after each data acquisition a short delay occurs before the next acquisition can be carried out Thus for measurements for which several spectrograms are required and the capturing process is repeated several times defined by the frame count a short gap in the results between spectrograms can be detected Measurement Time multiple captures ke Capture Buffer 1 Capture Buffer 2 Capture Buffer 3 seunjdeo ejdninu oe Swi juauiaJnsee N SS Spectrogram History Buffer
250. e search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Using Delta Markers The following commands control spectrogram delta markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers ELTamarker lt m CALCulate lt n gt MAXimum LEFT on page 315 e CALCulate lt n
251. e tolerance area of a nominal hop within the analy sis region Default unit ms Retrieving Results lt DwellTime gt The duration of a hop from begin to end that is the time the sig nal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal hop frequency Default unit ms lt SwitchTime gt The time the signal requires to hop from one level to the next It is defined as the time between a hop end and the following hop begin Default unit ms lt FreqNom gt Nominal frequency of the hop state Default unit kHz lt FreqAvg gt Average frequency measured within the frequency measure ment range of the hop Default unit kHz lt FreqDev gt Deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal hop state fre quency For details see Hop State Deviation on page 46 Default unit kHz lt FreqRel gt Relative difference in frequency between two hops For details see Relative Frequency Hop to Hop on page 47 Default unit kHz lt FMDevMax gt Maximum deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal hop frequency as defined in the Hop States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Frequency Deviation Peak on page 47 Default unit kHz lt FMDevRMS gt RMS deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal linear hop frequency as defined in the Hop States table The devia tion is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Frequenc
252. ed INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band iieri ei iei Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument Configuring Transient Analysis RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON A Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO RR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band R R SENS COR R R R CVL BAND USER CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO A A N A A A Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB jp se Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible ra
253. ed Eed oot ttr 110 Frequency Deviation Feelt sari asen eresie geed EE 47 48 Frequency Deviation Time Domain Result displays rnit enters 61 Frequency hopping rti m see also Hops iler tenore rz In Frequency results CHIS 54 Frequency Deviation 54 55 Measurement range 27 113 Remote 20233 Result displays cttm terere 57 Frontend Configuration Configuration remote Full capture Evaliiation basis 2 5 2o eee eiecti 129 H Handover frequency Eerad ente bees oat 81 External Mixer Remote control 193 Hardware settings el EE 13 Harmonics Conversion loss table icc ini rn ker External Mixer Remote control Order External Mixer AAA Type External Mixer A High pass filter Iced 189 EIDEN aere Mis sewed aoina eegen ege 78 Histogram bins Parameter Distribution 5 nre 125 History SDeCGIIOgralmis cette esee Ya ege eatur screen e read der aud 137 History Depth e 137 Hold Trace setting nro trs 132 Hop detection fo porto Uf GIO To RITE Howto unen E Measurement example Programming example REMOTE ug eee m Treubleshootifig 2 2 meret etes Hop Results Table Result displays entente iter inten 64 Hop states Auto detection EE 73 Basics 4 321 Configuritig 2er entire n erento nete 71 Bru
254. ed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA MSRT mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual BASIC ecu 190 E Old e TEE 192 e Conversion Loss Table Settings incen 197 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer 201 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer SENSe MIXer S KC 191 SENSe MIXermBIAS VAG es egene m 191 ISENSe Mier BIAStLOw 191 EE Ke Be 191 E ET e ET 192 ISENSeIMIXer THReshild 22 222 2 2622 5 2 2 eseu 192 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 81 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 84 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range
255. ed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting Conventions Used in the Documentation In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic info
256. ed not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the analysis region settings as in Signal and Spectrum Ana lyzer mode The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indicated in the window header for each result display User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 Ai R amp SSFSW K60 Measurement Basics Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not
257. ee een pt OUTPut TRIGgersport OT YPC riirii tsi tales ert rnnt ten rh Fever rna ERR ee t e Pa SEET isernia pa e PARI e EROS OUTPut TRIGgersport PULESe IMMEeH IAate oere irren erar toca Pr gere remet rotunda Fonero repens 221 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGLILh rone tror reperire rain e t n rre re naa 221 SENSe DEMOGTEMME TYBE tieniti ot rr eter oet eed esto ea deb Eo e ve cage heen ve CH LR EYE EE RES 239 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE essen 206 GvGfemCOMMunicateRDEVice OGCloscope Al Gnment GTEPIZSTATelg 205 SYSTem COMMu icate RDEVice OSCillosc ps IDN 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState 00 ee ce cee eee eee tenes renee tneeseeeeesaeeneeees 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip esee 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEViCe enn 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFlIRmware essen ene 208 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe seen 205 SYST m iPRESSECEIANnel EXEGC Ule cicer re eoe erre tp Echec a eri o RR RARE RI 187 ox STem SEOQUGIIGBL eror emot err rentre Pere EENEG 249 TRAGesnsEDATA X tnter eet ene cet bert eate ES a ce tpe eee P du tta one e de 366 Ee NEE RE RE 366 TRIGGER SEQUENCE HDD 215 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDOofI TIME ttr rere rh rr trt eene rece 215 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff
258. een tie leg EE 364 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE AVERage ccce nnm ee enne nnnm 365 ISENS amp CHIRp TIMInS RATE MAXIMUM pidii 1 kt cutn ea rnt re e rta 365 SENSe CHIRp T Ming RATE MINIMUM A 5 3 epar abus eaa na 365 SENSE ICHIRp TiMing RATE SDEVIBIIBN ioter no ome Ete pu rta une Ren Rd pen 365 CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe RESults lt Start gt lt End gt This command queries the chirp results table The result is a comma separated list of value sets one set for each chirp If no query parameters are specified the results for all detected chirps are returned Which values are returned depends on the enabled parameters for the results tables see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe COLumn on page 262 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Query parameters Start integer The chirp number of the first chirp to be returned Chirp numbers start at 1 End integer The chirp number of the last chirp to be returned Return values ID Timestamp which corresponds to the absolute time the begin ning of the chirp was detected lt ChirpNo gt Consecutive number of detected chirp starts at 1 for each new measurement lt Statelndex gt Consecutive number of corresponding nominal chirp state as defined in the Chirp States table see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes DATA on page 226 lt Begin gt Time offset from the analyis region start at which the signal first enters the
259. efine a file name and storage location and select OK To detect chirps in a transient measurement This procedure requires the additional option R amp S FSW K60C to be installed 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Transient application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Transient Analysis 3 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 4 Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input signal In MSRA MSRT mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 11 Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode on page 41 e Inthe Data Acquisition area define Measurement Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be captured Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be captured e Inthe Analysis Region area define the frequency range and time gate within the captured data which is to be analyzed that is which hops are to be detec ted See Analysis Region Optionally you can link the size of the analysis region to the size of the full cap ture buffer 5 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics e Inthe Signal Model tab select the Chirp signal model e Inthe Signal States tab define the known chirp states and the conditions for detection See chapter 6 2 2 Signal States on page 71 6 Select
260. eginning of the value range 2 Inthe Stop field enter the percentage from the right border of the histogram that marks the end of the value range Example The color map starts at 100 dBm and ends at 0 dBm i e a range of 100 dB In order to suppress the noise you only want the color map to start at 90 dBm Thus you enter 10 in the Start field The R amp S FSW shifts the start point 10 to the right to 90 dBm Adjusting the reference level and level range Note that changing the reference level and level range of the measurement also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram Editing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear i e the colors on the color map are distributed evenly If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution becomes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large amount of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range The color curve shape can be set numerically or graphically 8 2 How to Export Table Data To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider gt Select and drag the color curve shape slider indicated by a gray box in the middle of the color curve to the left or right The area beneath the slider is focussed i e more colors are dis
261. emory RST VISible Manual operation See Marker Search Area on page 151 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT C
262. ency FREQuency MINIMUM P s seem 355 ISGENGeJCHiRp FREOuencv FREOuencv SGDEViation 355 SENSe CHIRp FREQuaehcy MAXI mi cc 1 ecco reiten hn e nr dle 356 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm AVERagge ieeeicicesi cec eseuto ssa das inane ond dna 356 ISGENZejCHiRp FREOuencv MAXEmMANimum enne 356 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm MlINimum esee emen 356 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation eese nnn 356 ISENSe CHIRpIEREQUeBO RMSFY a struc vies oet sere ctc tinea ie waives raai 356 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm AVERage isses nnne nnn nnne 357 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum esses enne nennen 357 SENSe J CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MINimUutm iuuiicu icut ret et rnt nne enun 357 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm SDEViation sss 357 ONA Ol ADLA 357 Retrieving Results SEET 357 SENSe CHIRP EE EE 357 SENSe CHIBRD PHASe AVGPIm AVERBUOB ei ipn nennt hr men nob RE neun nabh nni onu naa 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm MAXimum eeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen enne nen 358 SENS amp CHIRp IPHASe AVGPm MINIUT 2 22 222 0 rit aiaa 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPmi SDEVIaliIol acer inch ui nen RR Ret eu E ana qn 358 SENS amp ICHIRpIPHIASS MAII dn acces d arre popa pun Rana aa Ee NENNEN 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPmiAVER Bge careo retra prre tp tkt eei ENEE sete kan 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm MAXimum
263. ency PERCent STATE 2 0 0seseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenanaaaaeae 241 CAL Culate lt n gt ARTIME UEN Gti ERES 241 CAL CulatesnzAR TIME PERQGeriL 2 titer mueren et ex TATRA E E 241 CALOCulate n AR TIME PERCent STATe essere nennen ennt nnne 242 e DE ENEE 242 CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency BANDwidth Frequency This command defines the analysis region s bandwidth The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Frequency Default unit HZ Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 110 CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency DELTa Frequency Defines the center of the frequency span for the analysis region It is defined as an off set from the center frequency The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Frequency Default unit HZ Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Delta Frequency on page 110 Configuring Transient Analysis CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency PERCent lt BWPercent gt For CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency PERCent STATe TRUE
264. enshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration Starting the Transient Analysis Application 2 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Applica 2 1 The R amp S FSW K60 is a firmware application that adds functionality to detect transient signal effects to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW K60 features Analysis of transient effects e Quick analysis even before measurement end due to online transfer of captured and measured UO data Easy analysis of user defined regions within the captured data Analysis of frequency hopping or chirped FM signals with additional Transient Analysis options This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes S
265. ent CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum
266. ent of the hop s dwell time This command is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 237 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Percent gt percent of the hop dwell time Range 0 to 100 RST 100 Example CALC HOPD FREQ LENG 10 Manual operation See Length on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin time Defines the beginning of the measurement range for frequency results as an offset in seconds from the hop start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate n HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 237 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS BEG 3e 6 Configuring Transient Analysis Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet END Time Defines the end of the measurement range for frequency results as an offset in sec onds from the hop end This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate n HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 237 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS END 3e 6 Exam
267. equencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 245 Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam CLEar on page 301 Color Map Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Traces gt Spectrogram gt Color Mapping or TRACE gt Spectrogram Config gt Color Mapping For more information on color maps see chapter 4 9 2 Color Maps on page 35 For details on changing color mapping settings see chapter 8 1 How to Configure the Color Mapping on page 161 Spectrogram Settings In addition to the available color settings the dialog box displays the current color map and provides a preview of the display with the current settings Start Shape Stop 100 0 Cold Radar Grayscale Fig 7 1 Color Mapping dialog box 1 Color map shows the current color distribution 2 Preview pane shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme 3 Color curve pane graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4 5 Color range start and stop sliders define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 Color curve slider adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 Histogram shows the d
268. er Power parameters Average power level measured during a hop Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range settings see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer AVEPOower on page 272 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower on page 343 Power Ripple Power parameters The power ripple is defined as the ratio of maximum to minimum power inside the power measurement range of the detected hop see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Mea surement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer PWRRipple on page 272 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP POWer MINPower on page 344 Chirp Parameters 5 2 Chirp Parameters If the additional option R amp S FSW K60C is installed various chirp parameters can be determined during transient analysis The chirp parameters to be measured are very similar to the hop parameters however some values are based on the chirp rather than a frequency so the resulting unit is Hz us The following graphic illustrates the main chirp parameters and characteristic values For a definition of the values used to determine the measured chirp parameters see chapter 4 3 2 Freq
269. er the selected analysis region e a selected individual chirp or hop for options R amp S FSW K60C K60H 1 Full FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw 2 Region FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw 3 Hop 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw E M 1 1001 pts 1 0 ms 10 0 ms 5 482877 ms 1001 pts 234 95 us 7 83236 ms 5 64328022 1001 9 97 5 74295022 Fig 5 1 Example for different data sources for the same result display FM Time Domain The data source for each result display is selected in the MEAS menu It is indicated in the description of the individual result displays The analysis region is indicated by a colored frame in the Full Spectrogram display and by vertical blue lines in result displays based on the full capture buffer For details on the analysis region see chapter 4 5 Analysis Region on page 23 For hop chirp based result displays the current hop chirp index as displayed in the result tables is indicated at the bottom of the hop chirp bar Measurement range vs result range The measurement range defines which part of a hop chirp is used for calculation for example for frequency estimation whereas the result range determines which data is displayed on the screen in the form of AM FM or PM vs time traces Exporting Table Results to an ASCII File Measurement result tables can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications For step by step instructions on how to export a table see chapter
270. erEND rere 234 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechionFbREOuencvRterence nnns 234 CAL Culate nz CHh Detechon PDOWer LENGnm eene nennen nnns 235 CAL Culate nz CHh Detechon PDOWer OFF Ger BEGin nennen 235 CAL Culate nz CHh Detechon PDOWer OEFGeCEND seen nnns nn enne nans 235 CAL Culate nz CHh Detechon PDOWerRtterence senses nnns n an 236 CALOCulate n HOPDetection F REQuency LENGIh essent 236 CALOCulate n HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BE Gm 236 CAL Culate nz HObDetechon FREOuencv OEFSerEND nnne 237 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechionFbRtOuencvRterence eene 237 CALCulate nz HObPDetechon POWer LENGnm esses nn sensn ans 237 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon PDOWer OFF Ger BEGin esas 238 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon PDOWer OEFGeCEND eene nn enne nnns 238 CAL Culate nz HObPDetechon PDOuWerRtterence eene t nnns 238 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency LENGth Percent Defines the length of the measurement range for frequency results in percent of the chirp length This command is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 236 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Percent percent of the chirp length Range 0 to 100 RST 100 Example CALC CHRD FREQ LENG 10 Configuring Transient Analysis Manual operation See Length on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin Time Defines
271. eration See Search Next Minimum on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 153 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT 315 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nnns ener 316 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK esses 316 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM AimumbRlcGHt essent 316 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 316 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMiNimumNENT eene nens iaa 316 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 316 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 317 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 152 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DELTa
272. es of hop states Applies a global Frequency Offset value to all hop states in the table at once To edit the frequency offset for an individual hop state select the value directly in the Hop States table and enter the new value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe OFFSet on page 231 6 2 3 Timing The dwell time is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal hop frequency that is the duration of a hop from beginning to end A hop chirp is only detected if its dwell time lies within the defined minimum and maximum values To configure the dwell time in the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Timing tab Auto IEN baten ege eee pe Eomae deme Eo seen 75 Minimaus MIS Pd LS TT REPETIT 76 Auto Mode If Auto Mode is enabled default useful dwell time chirp length limits for the current measurement are defined automatically Input Output and Frontend Settings Otherwise the manually defined Minimum Maximum values apply Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection LENGth AUTO on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection DWEL1 AUTO on page 228 Minimum Maximum If Auto Mode is disabled you can define minimum or maximum dwell times or both manually in order to detect only specific hops for example Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection LENGth MAXimum on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection LENGth MINimum on page 226 C
273. es or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters State AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Configuring Transient Analysis Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 78 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe State Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 78 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 78 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA Pulse Amplifier Transient Analysis DOCSIS and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP F
274. eseeeens 319 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXiIMUM NEXT essen nennen nennen CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimumg PEAK eese 320 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWe essen 320 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum BELoOw essen 320 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MiNimum NENT 320 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum PEAK eese 321 GALGulatesn MARKersmc TRA rire t rentre nn et E e P PX XR ERR rd PE ne XXE ER Rag 308 CALGulates n gt MARKES MA X aui concentrer titre ra ener o ER E EO Rea ERE ER EXFL YE SPEARS ISTE 309 ie Meu ies e 309 GALGulatesn MARKer mb STAT uestre trt rentrer rrt cene t tenerte ete 308 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW 1327 CAL Culat lt n MSRA ALING VALUE srren nresnani EAER 328 GALGulatesn MSRA WINDowsn VAL tarhin a n enr hn e EXER EXER Eg 328 GALGulate n RESultALIGnt6nl tr trente erri rere cou ree Er Re eco naii 258 CALC late rciiuciuizici m 259 GAL e Ee leg 259 GALGulatesn RESulERANGe AUTO 1 rn rtt rre rre ren nth d p rere nk Re o EE Ta 260 CALCulate lt n gt RESult REFerence GALGulatesn RTMS ALIN6e SFIQW uu cce tne rr terre en ree tree
275. est ENGL ttt tt ettet cet eene t pec bus 366 DISPIay EORMGL ineo terr ER E rr ER eive CY Ere ED e LARGE TE i dina ER Ere ra E Dee e Er cS 250 DISPlay MTABle RUE EVER E RE RUE EAR TE Ou RE EE DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault essere DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer esee nennen rennen DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe sess enne ea DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer sss nennen nennen nennen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STYLe hs DISPlay WINDowsrn TRACest MODE tnr etre rentre rr kr eene rcr nre s DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous sees enne rennen 299 DISPlayEWINDowsri TRACestzY SCALe nerit tren eterno rentre nte 295 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO 1 295 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe MAXimum sees enne nnnm 296 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eeseeeeeeeeeenneenennenneneen eere rennen 296 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision esses enne 296 DISPlayi WiINDow lt n gt TRAC6 lt t gt Y ESCALe RLEV l nennen 211 DISPlay WiNDow lt n gt TRAGe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVe OFF Sefi risiini aieas 212 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue DIS
276. et 357 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm SDEViation A 357 SENSE CHIRp FREQUency RM tm AEN 356 SENSe CHIRp IB2 ttt rt eet metes cn nod ten ee e at n t t nd ds 357 SENSe CHIRp NUMBJAE ite nete rne i a eec er an E Fence cre a re x ve 357 SENSe IC HIRp PHASe AVGPREAVERagSB acte eterni ni eet eter erede o ETENE ee carats 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm MAXimum SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm MINIImUtm atc cocina tette tent tr nt raten Ea tla ia 358 SENSe C HIRp PHASe AVGPm SDEWVIGBLOR occu ene nn eor piter ENEE 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGP caett etc t etl recte re dr era n d t e t e Cr ke TE 357 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm AVERage SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm MAXIIUET uiuit rank t cnet EL Ene b andan de n ed ea Eae E dE ed RE dee 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm MINimUm ctt ert tn kr b ehe d e ee 359 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm SDEVIatiOri iine snarar Fe data dna dida 359 JS ESTER Sdn In To dao Ia oil c 358 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm AVERAQe rtr rent tr tecnici n nee edd 359 SENSe GHIRp PERASe RMSPm MAXIIDUITI ucsci uoi eara e on toph aetduacenesncesscns ect EY IN E EET eH E Gaps 359 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm MINimum m SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm SDEViation rnnt hn eren riore edens E E ei elle E EE 359 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower AVERAAdgQSe conuertere trn n Ek n ap rn Rag 360 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MAXimutm
277. etection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm on page 356 Frequency Deviation RMS Frequency parameters fdevaus 1 gt fdev k frequency meas range for ke frequency meas range fdev is defined in Frequency Deviation Peak on page 54 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSFm on page 264 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm on page 356 Chirp Parameters Frequency Deviation Average Frequency parameters fdeVans gt fdev k frequency meas range amp for ke frequency meas range fdev is defined in Frequency Deviation Peak on page 54 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency AVGFm on page 264 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm on page 353 Phase parameters Chirp phase parameters All chirp phase deviation table values are calculated from the time domain result gdev k Pmeas k Pideai k for chirp start lt k lt chirp start chirp length where Omeas K instantaneous phase of the measured signal Qigea K ideal phase trajectory obtained from weighted linear regression of meas K within the frequency meas range Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe ALL STATe on page 264 Phase D
278. etector is set automatically see chapter 4 8 1 Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 29 The R amp S FSW offers the following trace modes Table 4 2 Overview of available trace modes Trace Mode Description Blank Hides the selected trace Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default set ting All available detectors can be selected Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each measurement until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level Average The average is formed over several measurements and displayed The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures See also chapter 4 8 3 Trace Statistic
279. eter Trend on page 66 See X Axis on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt TRENd Y Queries the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt YAxis gt Usage Query only Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Parameter Trend on page 66 See Y Axis on page 126 11 6 7 2 Chirp Parameter Trends CALGulate n cTRENG OCHIRp FREGUuenGy icit ENEE ita aorta nt e eria nde ere oon a eR RR YR EE 282 CALOCulate n TRENd CHIRp FREQuency X sessi enne nennen nnns 283 CALCE s TRENJ CHRP FREQUENCY Y ati ott ce euren eh e cae emu 283 CAL Gulate n cTRENG GHIRp PHASe 2 2 1 trucem cc eite EEE EE va Eee gy RYE RAE 283 CALCulate n TRENd CHIRp PHASe X eeeeeeee lieet NEEN nnn nhan nene nh EERE 284 CAL Culate nz REN CHl pbHAGey nennen nennen nsn nn trennen nain 284 CALCulatesms TRENJ CHIRE POWE EE 285 CAL Culate n TRENG CHIRp POWhOetEX 222 2 ona cette tn eiie ceueenee eda eae n uaa ce aiai 285 CAL Culate nz REN CHlb p POVWery eene nennen nnn nn tren ene rn aan 285 e TE ag el CN KN KEE 286 CALGulate ns TRENGIGHIBpISTATe X 21 oiii teet et eaoaai dp dace ee ved euis 286 GAL Culate lt n TRENG CHIR DIS TAT GLY iride toe te een ege 286 CAL Culate nz REN CHIRp TilMimg senem nnne nnne nnne 287 CAL e E ER e ele Elle 287 GALGCulatesn TRENSOHIRD CT gl e EE 287 e EE CALCulate l
280. eturns the statistical value for the RMS Phase Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe HOP NUMBer lt QueryRange gt Returns the hop numbers from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the average power from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Power on page 50 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average power from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire
281. eviation Peak Phase parameters Maximum of Phase Deviation vs Time trace The deviation is calculated within the phase measurement range of the hop see chap ter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 KEE max gdev k for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe MAXPm on page 265 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm on page 358 Phase Deviation RMS Phase parameters RMS of Phase Deviation vs Time trace LL E edev Q frequency meas range Pdev aus Chirp Parameters for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe RMSPm on page 265 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm on page 359 Phase Deviation Average Phase parameters Average of Phase Deviation vs Time trace f 3 pdev k frequency meas range pdev for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe AVGPm on page 265 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm on page 357 Power parameters Chirp power parameters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe POWer ALL STATe on page 265 Minimum Power Power parameters
282. f the current operation is displayed in the status bar 3 About Transient Analysis Transient analysis refers to signal effects which may appear briefly or change rapidly in time or frequency Typical examples are spurious emissions or modulated signals using frequency hopping techniques Such signals often require analysis of a large bandwidth if possible without gaps Ideally such signals are analyzed in real time mode which employs special hardware in order to capture and process data simultaneously and seamlessly However if a real time analyzer is not available the Transient Analysis application is a good choice Similarly to real time mode but without the special hardware this application captures data and asynchronously before data acquisition is completed starts analyzing the available input and displays first results Especially for large bandwidths or long mea surement times analysis becomes much more efficient and the complete measure ment task can be sped up significantly Although gaps may occur between successive measurements with large bandwidths the results from each individual measurement are complete without gaps Thus the Transient Analysis application supports you in analyzing time and fre quency variant signals with large bandwidths 4 1 4 2 Data Acquisition Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in analysis of transi ent signals is provided here for a
283. fied chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp Rate on page 53 11 9 3 Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp rate from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Trace Data In order to retrieve the trace results in a remote environment use the following com mand Useful commands for retrieving trace results described elsewhere CALCulatecn DISTribution X on page 280 CALCulate n DISTribution Y on page 280 Remote commands exclusive to CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNC essen 365 DISPlay IWINDow n TRAGeSES EEN GI ui ier etta rri dde thee hri 366 TRA eens DATA 366 RRE pups v ii aa aae R 366 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt This command queries the number of frames that are contained in the se
284. ge Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp PHASe lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp phase parameters over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Chirp begin Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp PHASe X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp phase parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp PHASe Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp phase parame ters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation Usage Setting only Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp POWer lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp trends over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters
285. ge 308 Select Marker The Select Marker function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly Selected State Selected State Selected State re oua E n Loa os Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 308 7 8 2 Marker Settings General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers These settings are located in the Marker Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Then select the horizontal Marker Settings tab 13 25 GHz Meas Markers Marker Settings Search Marker Table Linked Markers Show Marker Legend in Spectrogram on Marker Table Display 22 esessecanyecesectvyedaedes scence ogee vet EEaren AAEEen aE TEA SEEEN 148 Linked WE cerei etes ced cei iei cen 149 show Marker Legend in Spectrogralm i ur rere iu Ren RR ER 149 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area
286. generator settings e g R amp S SMBV100A Frequency 4 GHz Level 30 dBm Channels CW Hopping channel 0 dB DC carrier 20 dB Hops 20 0 20 2 20 4 20 6 20 8 21 0 MHz Dwell time 200 us Sample rate 100 MHz Settings in the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application To identify a hopped FM signal 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 4 GHz 3 Set the reference level to 30 dBm R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Select the MODE key and then the Transient Analysis button Select the signal model Hop From the Meas Config menu select Data Acquisition Set the measurement time to 5 ms Set the measurement bandwidth to 160 MHz o o uoo rn The RF Spectrum and Full Spectrogram displays are dominated by the DC carrier Define an analysis region to extract the hopped FM signal Make sure that a suffi cient number of hops are inside the analysis region A second spectrogram show ing the analysis region helps with fine tuning 1 Magnitude Capt D mm quisition Full Analysis Region AR Link AR to Full Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth q i Sample Rate Delta Freq 2 5Muz Meas Time Time Gate Length Record Lenggb 200000 Time Gate Start tous i 0 0s I 1 010 0 TS JU ps7 RS Time 2 Full Spectrogram 3 Region Spectrogram 7 N 1001pts Meas BW 160 0 MHz Frame amp 0 CF 4 0205 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 5 0 MHz Frame 0 F
287. gger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active this parameter activates the CH3 input con nector on the oscilloscope Then the R amp S FSW triggers when the signal fed into the CH3 input connector on the oscilloscope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscilloscope must be used EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger s
288. gs Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results Depending on the type of result display different settings are available These settings are available in the Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search Settings tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab Marker Settings Markers Marker Settings Search Next X Search Absolute Next Y Search Search Type X Search Y Search Search Area Visible 1 qo aliaa 6 0 dBm Ke Cen 3 Full Spectrogram t Fig 7 3 Marker search settings for spectrogram Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direchon nnn 150 Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction cesse e 150 Maiko Search TYPO OE 151 Marker Search tes iint rrt ireid nra Tertia ode nr inper n 151 POSEE reel iiU UdeMM EMI 152 Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction Selects the search mode for the next peak For spectrograms Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to eit
289. gt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m MAXimum PEAK on page 316 gt ELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 316 e CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 316 E ru G g B D E e CALCulatecn ELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 317 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbam ERAMe nennen nennen 322 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe essere 322 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbam GAtea rennen 322 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SARea sse 322 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK esses 322 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK cessus 322 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGGbam Xv MiNimumtPEAKT renerne nneeereeeeo 323 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGbEChooram SZ MiNimumfPEART nene nneeneennene 323 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABONWVe sse 323 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooramv MAximum AbBOVe 323 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum DEI ow 323 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPE
290. gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe STEP on page 232 No of States Generating a series of hop states Number of hop states to be generated A maximum of 1000 states can be defined in one table Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe NSTates on page 231 Signal Description Add to Table Generating a series of hop states Adds the defined number of hop states starting at the Start Frequency with the defined Step Size and a tolerance of 1 2 the Step Size to the existing states in the Hop States table Remote command CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes TABLe ADD on page 230 Replace Table Generating a series of hop states Replaces any existing states in the Hop States table by the defined number of hop states starting at the Start Frequency with the defined Step Size and a tolerance of 1 2 the Step Size Remote command CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes TABLe REPLace on page 231 Applying a global tolerance value Generating a series of hop states Applies a global Tolerance value to all hop states in the table at once By default a tolerance of 1 2 the Step Size is applied when a series of states is generated To edit the tolerance value for an individual hop state select the value directly in the Hop States table and enter the new value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe TOLerance on page 233 Applying a global frequency offset Generating a seri
291. gt RTMS ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt n gt is irrelevant 11 9 Retrieving Results Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time pretrigger posttrigger of the MSRT measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRT View or MSRT Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet lt Offset gt This setting is only available for applications in MSRT mode not for the MSRT Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range pretrigger time to min posttrigger time sweep time
292. h an IF power trigger the hysteresis refers to the robust width trigger For details see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 216 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 215 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 220 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 220 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is i
293. hRamlGbtCrooram ERAMe GE ect 301 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogramtHDEPth iioii ioco uaa eda den ua a noto eda opua 302 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution sess 302 CALOCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram RE Solution AUTO 303 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATAQ sesssssssssssssse eene 303 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe sse 304 IGENSGe JDuINDow nzJGGbamlGbtCiooram DE Techor FUNCHon 304 SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow EENGIth ianreeeree ener rene eene sanete atenta 305 SENSe SWEep FF T2WINDOW TYBE oiii dirae de Eo rub REESEN apo ini MER REY a Ee 305 CALCulate n SGRam CLEar This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Spectrogram on page 140 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect Frame Time This command selects a specific frame for further analysis The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended Analyzing Transient Effects The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on th
294. he Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 245 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the S
295. he color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution becomes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large amount of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be able to detect small variations of the signal Example Fig 4 15 Linear color curve shape 0 colors are distributed evenly over the complete result range In the color map based on the linear color curve the range from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm is covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Fig 4 16 Spectrogram with default color curve The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow which occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other hand is dominated by various shades of red only Fig 4 17 Non linear color curve shape 0 5 Fig 4 18 Spectrogram with shifted color curve User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 37 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 9 3 4 10 4 10 1 Markers in the Spect
296. he splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 255 Analyzing Transient Effects LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Retur
297. he trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 In MSRT mode the offset may be negative if a pretrigger time is defined For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Remote command MSRT mode SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet on page 330 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region You must define how much and how data is captured from the input signal and which part of the captured data is to be analyzed For details see chapter 4 1 Data Acquisition on page 16 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region Data A Data Acquisition Full Analysis Region AR Meas Time 350 0 us Time Gate Length 350 0 us Record Length 140000 Time Gate Start m MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum
298. he window that contains the result table in the Specifics for selection box 2 3 4 Selectthe Table Config tab 5 Select the vertical Table Export tab 6 Select whether you want to export all columns or only the currently visible columns of the table 7 If necessary change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file 8 Select the Export Table to ASCII File button 9 In the file selection dialog box select the storage location and file name for the export file 10 Select Save to close the dialog box and export the table data to the file Example Hopped FM Signal 9 Measurement Examples 9 1 The following measurement examples demonstrate some basic functions and mea surement tasks assuming the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed e Example Hopped FM Sigrnal terrere enn n nune nno e e ERSRHR RR RRRR ERA 166 e Example Chirped FM Gonal seen 171 Example Hopped FM Signal A practical example for a basic transient analysis measurement is provided here It demonstrates how to identify a hopped signal how to detect hops and how to analyze an individual hop The measurement is performed using the following devices e An R amp S FSW with application firmware R amp S FSW K60 Transient Analysis K60H Hopped Transient Analysis and bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 e A vector signal generator e g R amp S SMBV100A Fig 9 1 Test setup Signal
299. her side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 11 6 12 4 Positioning the Marker on page 313 Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction Selects the search mode for the next peak search within all frames at the current marker position Marker Settings This function is available for spectrograms only Up Determines the next maximum minimum above the current peak in more recent frames Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum above or below the current peak in all frames Down Determines the next maximum minimum below the current peak in older frames Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe on page 319 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe on page 323 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow on page 319 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow on page 323 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT on page 319 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT on page 323 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe on page 320 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe on page 324 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page 320 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page
300. hop Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency CHERror on page 264 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror on page 354 Chirp Parameters Average Frequency Frequency parameters Average frequency measured within the frequency measurement range of the chirp see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency FREQuency on page 264 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency on page 355 Frequency Deviation Peak Frequency parameters Maximum of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace All chirp frequency deviation table values are calculated from the time domain result fdev k fmeas k fiaeai k for chirp start lt k lt chirp start chirp length where fmeas k instantaneous frequency of the measured signal fiaea K ideal frequency trajectory obtained from weighted quadratic regression of the instantaneous signal phase ja K within the frequency measurement range see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 The peak deviation is thus defined as Jeun max fdev k for ke frequency meas range Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXFm on page 264 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRD
301. ic value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 180 Querying text parameters When you query text
302. ides results for all table parameters except the specified Headers RST ON Analyzing Transient Effects Headers ALL STATe BEGin DWELI SWITching STAFrequency FREQuency RELFrequency FMERror MAXFm RMSFm AVGFm MINPower MAXPower AVGPower PWRRipple AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm All listed parameters are displayed or hidden in the table results depending on the State parameter ALL See chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 44 STATe Hop state BEGin Hop Begin DWELI Hop dwell time SWITching Switching time STAFrequency State frequency nominal FREQuency Average frequency RELFrequency Relative frequency hop to hop FMERror Hop state deviation MAXFm Maximum frequency deviation RMSFm RMS frequency deviation AVGFm Average frequency deviation MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power AVGPower Average power PWRRipple Power ripple AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation Analyzing Transient Effects Example CALC HOPD TABL COL ON HOPNo STATe Provides results for the HOP number and HOP state only Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe FREQuency ALL STATe lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled all frequency parameters are included in the result tables see Frequency parameters on page 46
303. ig 9 2 Configuring an analysis region for a hopped FM signal a From the Meas Config menu select Display Config b Drag a second spectrogram display to the right of the existing one on the screen c Exit the SmartGrid mode d Press the MEAS key then select Analysis Region to restrict the Spectrogram display to the analysis region By default the analysis region corresponds to the entire capture buffer 10 From the Meas Config menu select Data Acquisition a Define the starting point of the analysis region as an offset from the center fre quency Delta Freq b Define the width of the analysis region as a Bandwidth Be sure to include several hops in the frequency range c Define the starting point and the length of the time gate Again be sure to include several hops in the time gate 11 Since the signal model is set to Hop and the Auto Mode for detection is on the hops are detected automatically The detected hop states are listed in the order of User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 167 Example Hopped FM Signal their occurrence in the Signal States table From the Meas Config menu select Signal Description to check them Signal States Signal Model Timing Hop States Number of hop states 12 Tolerance Auto Mode On State Index m o T m Ce E rd EN Hi A Lk Frequency 20 01251161 MHz 19 99252328 MHz 20 80951627 MHz 20 58842732 MHz 20 60942073 MHz 20 788
304. ignal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 102 See Free Run on page 103 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 103 See External CH3 on page 103 See IF Power on page 103 See UO Power on page 104 See RF Power on page 104 11 4 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW Configuring Transient Analysis ODTPul nRIGSerspornb DIRBPIIOD ceo terna rema ctetu e eot tet nade herren 220 OUTPuETRIGSerspont LBVel E 220 OUTPut TRIGger port OTYBG6 i cceee racc eL apnea itta nnn no nn naa Rand na vo ada ca ka eread aa Ra RR 220 OUTPut TRIGger pornt PULSe1MMediate 4 uo o ener raa etas traite o ter o Rea enn n 221 OUTPUETRIGgerport gt PULSe ENGLth 22 iiri eiat cercate ern AER 221 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 99 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have sele
305. ignal remains in the tol erance area of a nominal hop frequency Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing DWEL1 on page 273 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP TIMing DWEL1 on page 348 Switching Time Timing parameters The time the signal requires to hop from one level to the next It is defined as the time between a hop end and the following hop begin The first switching time result can only be determined after the first hop has been detected Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing SWITching on page 273 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching on page 348 Frequency parameters Hop frequency parameters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe STATe ALL STATe on page 272 State Frequency Nominal Frequency parameters Nominal frequency of the hop state as defined in Hop States table Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe STATe STAFrequency on page 272 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency on page 346 Average Frequency Frequency parameters Average frequency measured within the frequency measurement range of the hop see chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command
306. igure a different parameter to be dis played for both the x axis and the y axis making this a very powerful and flexible analysis tool Note however that the same parameter may not be selected on the x axis and y axis 2 Freq Dev RMS vs Avg Frequency Trend 1AP Clrw 43 2 MHz 8 64 MHz 43 20001 MHz Note that averaging is not possible for parameter trend traces Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PTR see ow on page 251 on page 281 on page 281 Parameter Trends on page 281 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers 6 Marker Table WndTypeeferenc Trace Frame X Value Y Value 1 0 13 25 GHz 113 96 dBm Mi 1 0 320 0 kHz 0 52 dB Mi 1 0 320 0 kHz 0 52 dB M1 1 0 640 0 KHz 2 08 dB 1 0 13 25 GHz 113 96 dBm 1 0 320 0 KHz 0 52 dB 1 1 0 320 0 KHz 0 52 dB 1 M M M A 640 0 kHz 2 08 dB User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 66 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 309 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 309 6 1 EH EI Ee Overview Configuration Overview Configuration Transient analysis requires a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on th
307. ime Domain Res lt displays ertt ertet 62 PM Time Domain Wrapped Res lt displays ete metere etis 63 Ports External Mixer Remote control 197 Positive Peak detector rne ener erre 29 Power results 50 56 57 CHIS R 57 Measurement range 27 113 s ilios 233 Preamplifier i re M 97 fecic 97 Preset Bands External Mixer remote control 193 External Mixet sce 5er terrre e erret 81 Presetting Channels rre tr rene et Ete perg 70 Pretrigget iere irre Eee enr d RR dn 105 Programming examples Chirp detection gu eror mers 373 External Mixer 201 hop detection Be Parameter distribution 2378 EI 372 Protection REIDEN Eege 38 RE inpui remote EE 188 R Range reme 127 128 FRecord lengltli isto ccepit tides ee 109 Reference Measurement range trt enhn reps 114 Result range Reference level ALO TOVE M Offset POSION iiic ccce dac ad Zeegeg e nce cus cesta d desees Bp rer Value Reference El uui oto etat Eco D re nd POR Ras 146 Reference position ell Le EIE 128 Reference value ell Le EE 128 Refreshing MSRA applications esee 117 MSRA applications remote sess 246 MSRT applications xis MSRT applications remote sssss 246 DONKEY
308. ime Domain Wrapped Chirp Rate Time Domain Find out more about trace evaluation e Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector 29 e Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode 31 Trace Slalislios 5 ica dica cere E O n de 32 Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector A trace displays the values measured at the measurement points The number of sam ples taken during a measurement is much larger than the number of measurement points that are displayed in the measurement trace Obviously a data reduction must be performed to determine which of the samples are displayed for each measurement point This is the trace detector s task The trace detector can analyze the measured data using various methods o The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information by an abbreviation Table 4 1 Detector types Detector Abbrev Description Positive Peak Pk Determines the largest of all positive peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Negative Peak Mi Determines the smallest of all negative peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Auto Peak Ap Combines the peak detectors determines the maximum and the minimum value of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are disp
309. ime while the measurement is running In single sweep mode or if the measurement is stopped the timestamp shows the time and date of the end of the measurement When active the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe on page 304 CALCulate cn SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA on page 303 Color Mapping Opens the Color Map dialog Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep Separator Colors For each color scheme see Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 141 you can con figure the colors used to indicate the analysis range and sweep separator lines in spec trograms For details on the analysis range and sweep separator lines see chapter 4 5 Analysis Region on page 23 and chapter 4 9 1 Time Frames on page 34 Spectrogram Settings Selected Object COLD Analysis Region Predefined Colors Preview Userdefined Colors Selecting the Object Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep Separator Colors Selects the object for which the color is to be defined Colors can be defined for each combination of color scheme analysis region color scheme sweep separator Preview Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep Separator Colors Indicates the currently selected color that will be used for the selected object Predefined Colors Modifying Analysis Region and Sweep Separator Colors Displays the available colors from the predefined
310. inal hop state frequency from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin lt QueryRange gt Returns the begin times from the Results table for the specified hop s The begin time is the relative time in ms from the capture start at which the signal first enters the tolerance area of a nominal hop within the analysis region Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Hop Begin on page 45 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the begin time from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI lt QueryRange gt Returns the dwell time from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt
311. ined in reference to the rising or falling edge Center The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the hop chirp Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 234 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 236 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 237 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 238 6 8 FM Video Bandwidth Length Defines the length or duration of the frequency phase power measurement range Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency LENGth on page 233 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer LENGth on page 235 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency LENGth on page 236 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer LENGth on page 237 Offset Begin Offset End The offset in seconds from the beginning or end of the Reference Remote command CALCulate n CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 234 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 234 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 235 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer OFFSet END on page 235 CALCulate n HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 236 CALCulate n HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 237 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 238 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer OFFSet END on page 238
312. ing remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 4 Trigger Settings on page 100 MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for transient analysis See chapter 11 7 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only on page 327 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Configuring Transient Analysis OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned 11 4 4 1 e Configuring the Triggering Conditions 215 e Configuring the Nuel 219 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGger oEQuencelD EE 215 TRlGoert GtEOuencel HOL Doft TIME 215 TRIGE SEQuencel IF Power e e EE 215 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYS TereSjS nina
313. ing using absolute minimum and maximum values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 296 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 296 Relative Scaling Reference per Division Define the scaling relative to a reference value with a specified value range per divi sion Per Division Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the value range to be displayed per division of the diagram 1 10 of total range Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the Result Configuration smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe PDIVision on page 296 Ref Position Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the position of the reference value in percent of the total y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 297 Ref Value Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue on page 297 Spectrogram y scaling For spectrograms the disp
314. into sev eral overlapping FFT frames This is especially useful in conjunction with window func tions since it enables a gap free frequency analysis of the signal Using overlapping FFT frames leads to more individual results and improves detection of transient signal effects However it also extends the duration of the calculation The size of the FFT frame depends on the number of input signal values record length the overlap factor and the time resolution time span used for each FFT calculation Signal Processing FFT window functions Each FFT frame is multiplied with a specific window function after sampling in the time domain Windowing helps minimize the discontinuities at the end of the measured sig nal interval and thus reduces the effect of spectral leakage increasing the frequency resolution Additional filters can be applied after demodulation to filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals Asynchronous data processing During a measurement in the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application the data is captured and stored in the capture buffer until the defined measurement time has expired As soon as a minimum amount of data is available the first FFT calculation is performed As soon as the required number of overlapping FFT results is available defined by the sweep count the detector function is applied to the data and the first frame is displayed in the Spectrogram and any other activ
315. ion lt t gt 1 6 Trace Activating Transient Analysis Transient Analysis requires a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INSTi ment erii M2 184 INSTrument GREate REPLace 2 i ANE SNE SEENEN ESA 184 INS Whit ee eegen ESA dece hane Roa AER AER 184 INS TramentbI S T2 ancient eren iode edi der tede dE decet tede iate eb poet REG 185 Activating Transient Analysis INST BRE SE GTI E 186 INS Tren SE WE 186 SYSTem PRES6t OHANNES EvtECutel eene nennen nnns 187 INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 185 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 185 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional UO Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This
316. ion See Linking to Another Marker on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt State This command links delta marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt delta marker lt m1 gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF lt Reference gt This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 Parameters lt Reference gt Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 146 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 146 See Marker Type on page 146 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have
317. ion AUTO Reference This command switches the spectrogram time resolution from auto to manual The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters Reference AUTO MANual AUTO The optimal resolution is determined automatically according to the data acquisition settings MANual You must define the time resolution using CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution Manual operation See Time Resolution on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA lt Frames gt This command queries the time stamp starting time of the frames The return values consist of four values for each frame If the spectrogram is empty the command returns 0 0 0 0 The times are given as delta values which simplifies evaluating relative results however you can also calculate the absolute date and time as displayed on the screen The frame results themselves are returned with TRAC DATA SGR See TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 366 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frames gt CURRent Returns the starting time of the current frame ALL Returns the starting time for all frames The results are sorted in descending order beginning with the current frame Return values lt Seconds gt Number of seconds that have passed since 01 01 1970 till the frame start lt Nanoseconds gt Number of nanoseconds that have passed in addition to the lt Seconds gt since 01 01 1970 till the frame
318. ion POWer OFFSet END on page 238 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the hop CALC HOPD POW REF EDGE See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 See Reference on page 114 Configuring Demodulation SENSEDEMOd EMVETYBE echter ho nh eege TESS EE Ee 239 SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE Filter Activates or deactivates additional filters applied after demodulation to filter out unwan ted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals Parameters Filter Example Manual operation NONE LP01 LP1 LP5 LP10 LP25 NONE No video filter applied LP01 Low pass filter 0 1 96 bandwidth LP1 Low pass filter1 bandwidth LP5 Low pass filter 5 96 bandwidth LP10 Low pass filter 10 96 bandwidth LP25 Low pass filter 25 96 bandwidth SENS DEM FMVF TYPE LPO1 See FM Video Bandwidth on page 112 11 4 11 Configuring Transient Analysis Selecting the Analysis Region The analysis region determines which data is displayed on the screen see also chap ter 4 5 Analysis Region on page 23 CAL Culatesm AR FREQUency BANDWIdlh 22 cnet terret Rer nea arcte o ena 240 CAL Culate n AR FREQuency DEL Ta recur ec cout za te zo cupa a po EAEE ee e Ra See 240 CALOCulate n AR FREQuency PERCent sss nennen ener nnt rere nnns 241 CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQu
319. ions Table export settings can be configured in the Result Configuration dia log box in the Table configuration tab in the vertical Table Export tab The settings are window specific and only available for result tables Columns to Export Table Export Configuration Defines which of the result table columns are to be included in the export file Visible Only the currently visible columns in the result display are exported All All columns including currently hidden ones for the result display are exported Decimal Separator Table Export Configuration Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 368 Export Table to ASCII File Table Export Configuration Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected result table in ASCII format DAT to the specified file and directory Note To store the measurement results for all traces and tables in all windows use the Export Trace to ASCII File command in the Save Recall Export menu See also chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 133 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that sto
320. ironment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e Reference File format description e List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in print
321. irp begin LENGth Chirp length RATE Chirp rate Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters Y Axis COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of chirps in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured chirps in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP FREQuency lt XAxis gt lt YAxis gt Configures the Parameter Distribution result display for hop frequency parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt AVGFm FMERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm RELFrequency FREQuency Average frequency RELFrequency Relative frequency hop to hop FMERror Hop state deviation MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation Setting parameters lt YAxis gt COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of hops in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured hops in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution HOP PHASe XAxis lt YAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Distribution result display for hop phase parameters over time Analyzing Transient Effects The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm
322. is command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 81 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 81 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 81 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Configuring Transient Analysis Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 81 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the exte
323. is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Note When triggering is activated the squelch function is automatically disabled Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 218 Trigger Settings Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 218 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 104 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active only External CH3 is supported For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 218 External CH3 Trigger
324. isplayed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection SELected on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection SELected on page 261 Trace Settings The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Trace settings are available when you do one of the following Press the TRACE key then select Trace Config nthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Traces tab Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 133 Traces Transient Analysis EN Traces Trace Data Export Spectrogram Detector Statistics Mode Auto Type Hold Selected H ce m CE m m La Auto Peak mm Max Trace Points m Quick Config b Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode Mox AvgiiMin Mox Cirwirite Min OO O 1 Full RF Time Domain H Statistical EVAlWAWON BEE 132 L Selected Hop Selected Chirp vs All Hops All Chile 132 Trace Settings L Swap Average COME stint otl de ote dao RE a d dedi 133 L Maximum number of trace points 133 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Gohtkeys 133 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRA
325. istribution of measured values 8 Scale of the horizontal axis value range Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor LOWer on page 306 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor UPPer on page 306 Shape Se the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display 1 to lt 0 More colors are distributed among the lower values o Colors are distributed linearly among the values gt 0 to 1 More colors are distributed among the higher values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe on page 306 Hot Cold Radar Grayscale Sets the color scheme for the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STYLe on page 306 Export Functions Auto Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for optimized display Set to Default Sets the color mapping to the default settings Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor DEFault on page 305 7 7 Export Functions m Access Save gt Export The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings that are available for all R amp S FSW applications are not described here See the R amp S FSW User Manual for a description of the standard functions Export Table to ASCII File cisci tet mi eer a e re n a re
326. ividual hop chirp k Result Range Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FDEV see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 PM Time Domain Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or versus time 2 Chirp 1 PM Time Domain e 1AP Clm 30 719998904 us 796 pts 796 0 ns 38 679998855 us The PM time domain trace is determined as follows Se gt Sa a User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 62 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Results Analysis Region Phase Auto Peak d d Phase Fiter Complex Fa Unwrapping Detector PM Time Domain Fc wrapped Trace Data Auto Peak Deiecor Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PMT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 PM Time Domain Wrapped Displays the phase deviations of the wrapped demodulated PM signal in rad or ver sus time 3 Chirp 1 PM Time Domain Wrapped 1AP Clrw 30 719998904 us 796 pts 796 0 ns 38 679998855 us Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PMWR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 Phase Deviation Time Domain Displays the phase error of the demodulated PM signal in rad or versus time This display requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H 4 Region Phase Deviation Time Domain 1AP Clrw E J a 19 93 us 449 525 us 1 2 3 250 216 us 1001 pts Fig 5 7 Phase deviation per chirp over time Note Similar to frequency deviation the phase error is calculated for complete hops chirps only Thus where no
327. iving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 38 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics a ee 4 10 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files The I Q data to be evaluated in a particular R amp S FSW application can not only be cap tured by the application itself it can also be loaded from a file provided it has the cor rect format The file is then used as the input source for the applicati
328. l chirp rate or hop Which measurement basis is available for which result display is indicated in table 5 1 These commands are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed BISPlay WIN Dawes VAL aided ctia aoa e Roux n eee o REIR SERE BE ex qu na n ee nage re t Venen etra ta RR nce 257 DISPlay WINDow n EVAL lt Eval gt Determines the evaluation basis for the specified result display Which evaluation basis is available for which result display is indicated in table 5 1 11 6 3 Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters lt Eval gt FULL REGion SIGNal FULL the full capture buffer REGion the selected analysis region see chapter 11 4 11 Selecting the Analysis Region on page 240 SIGNal an individual selected hop chirp see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection SELected on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection SELected on page 261 RST depends on result display Example DISP WIND1 EVAL SIGN Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Full Capture Region Analysis Hop Chirp on page 129 Configuring the Result Range The result range determines which data is displayed on the screen see also Mea surement range vs result range on page 43 These settings are
329. lable by selecting the Result Config soft key or the Result Config button in the Overview 7 2 1 PRESUME FANS M Ur 120 RE Leer UL EE 122 Parameter Configuration for Result Display 124 bic revenu 126 BI m N 128 Result Range The result range determines which data is displayed on the screen see also Mea surement range vs result range on page 43 This range applies to the hop chirp mag nitude frequency and phase vs time displays These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed Result Range Table Config Parameter Scale Units Automatic Range Scaling Auto On mm Auto Scale Once Reference Point Result Range Offset The range is defined by a reference point alignment and the range length Result Configuration Automauc Ranga e DEE 121 Result Range Reference Point 121 OMS e H 121 ATEM E M 121 LENG M S 121 Automatic Range Scaling Defines whether the result range length is determined automatically according to the width of the selected hop chirp see Select Hop Select Chirp on page 130 OFF Switches automatic range scaling off ON Switches automatic range scaling on Remote command CALCulate lt n gt RESult RANGe AUTO on page 260 Result Range Reference Point
330. late n HOPDetection DWELI MAXimum eiat nne eria CALCulate n HOPDetection DWELI MINimuUm eese nennen enne Da Neita CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency lENGUn oen orna retener enu e eren pepe ETTEN CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin D CALGulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency OFF Set END CALCulate n HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence eee eei eene Dre gE A SEED EPRE CALGCulatesn HOPDetection POWer LENGU stivis raa riae rr rr nere a nae CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer OFFSet END i GALGulate n HOPDetection POWer IREFerence cucto trn nr enn tree nena rede dung GALGulate n HOPDetection SELected cca t enr rtr e rere n re de E tah CALCulatesn FIOPDetectioni S TAT amp S AU TQ ines conto irr ote ran nut ky tb Cono eg eye rte NOTES See ER AEN Rag GALCulate n HOPDetection S TATes NUMBBer eerte rent en tnr teer 230 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe ADD CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe LOAD CAL Culate nz HObietechhon GTATes AB ehNtGlateed 231 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes TABLe OFFSet sesssssssssssssesseeeeneen nene 231 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe REPLace i291 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe SAVE nennen enne a ET seinen 232 CALCulate lt n gt H
331. layed in one sample point RMS Rm Calculates the root mean square of all samples contained in a measurement point The RMS detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of the wave form CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Correc tion factors as needed for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required Trace Evaluation Detector Abbrev Description Average Av Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a measurement point To this effect R amp S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of samples linear average value For logarithmic display the logarithm is formed from the average value For linear display the average value is dis played Each measurement point thus corresponds to the average of the mea sured values summed up in the measurement point The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irrespective of the waveform CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Sample Sa Selects the last measured value of the levels measured at the individual fre quencies which are displayed in one sample point all other measured values for the frequency range are ignored The result obtained from the selected detector for a measurement point is displayed as the value at this x axis p
332. layed y levels are defined as a range below the reference level Range Spectrogram y scaling Defines the full value span in dB that can be displayed by the color map Note that the span actually used for the color map definition may be restricted see Start Stop on page 141 Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe on page 295 Ref Level Position Spectrogram y scaling Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in 9e where 0 96 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram For spectrograms this value defines the position of the reference level value within the span covered by the color map In this case the value is given in where O corre sponds to the maximum right end and 100 to the minimum left end of the color map Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 297 7 2 5 Units The unit for phase display is configurable This setting is described here 7 3 Evaluation Basis 1AP Clrw 2 Region FM Time Domain Result Range Table Config Parameter Scale Units Phase Unit deg rad Phase EE 129 Phase Unit Defines the unit in which phases are displayed degree or rad Remote command CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe on page 295 Evaluation Basis Depending on the measurement task not all of the measured data in the capture b
333. le by selecting the Result Config softkey or the Result Config button in the Overview and switching to the Parameter and then the Trend tab Note that this tab is only available for windows with a Parameter Trend evaluation 7 2 4 Result Configuration X Axis Defines the parameter for the trend which is displayed on the x axis For a description of the parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 44 chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRENd X on page 281 Y Axis Defines the parameter for the trend which is displayed on the y axis For a description of the parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 44 chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRENd Y on page 281 Swap X and Y Axis Swaps the paramters on the x axis and y axis in a Parameter Trend result display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRENd SWAP XY on page 281 Y Axis Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here tesu t Con guration RR SS ERDF riim Transient Analvsi E Result Range Table Config Parameter Scale Units Automatic grid scaling Auto o edu ording to min and max values Max 90 0 dBm Min 290 0 dBm 90 0 am Ref 40 8 d Scaling according to reference and per div Per Division 20 0 dB
334. leS DEVialioni 2 22 ccr eee deron no p tret 345 ISENSe JHOP STATe 1NDex 2 xe tees rut nuo eege nua ra arare xr a bera Rr aurae conan hen 345 SENS amp eTHOP STATe INDex AVERGAQeY EE 346 SENSe HOP STATe INDex EMAXimbIm riva ciue ra rete idc ttti rette 346 SENSe HOP STATe INDex MINimum 2 eeeeeee eene nennen 346 SENSe HOP STATe INDex SDEViation ceeeeseseeeeeeeennnen nennen 346 ISENS amp J HOP STATe STAFtequeray 2 roti remet a Led n ei a ru ER 346 IGENZGelHOp GTATeGiAtreouency AVERage nnne enne nennen 346 SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency MAXimum cesses enne 346 SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency MINIMUM i nennen nnn 347 SENSe HOP STATe STAFrequency SDEViation 2 rte tia occupano eec eee oed dS 347 Retrieving Results SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin eee tnter tette ttt toni 347 SENSeJHOP TIMitig BEGID AVE Rage rone etr exer en e eene en cuan 347 ISENGe IHOp TlMimng BEGinMANiImum nennen nennen nennen 347 ISENSe THOPZPIMInS BEGIPDIMITNTDRUUTY AG 223225 75r Cuna abeant ley neret tene 347 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin SDEVialtlon e 22 2 2 n rore nna EE EE Er a a R ieee 347 SENSe HOP TMm ER EE 348 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI AVERage sese ee enne 348 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELEEMAXIImHITI 2 211r asthe AER ii erae Saec g 348 SENSe HOP Mmg OWELEMINIMUM EE 348 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI SDEViation
335. lect the suitable color used to display the analysis Separator Colors on page 137 e Hot Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low levels red colors indi cate high ones Q o a Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low levels blue colors indicate high ones The Cold color scheme is the inverse Hot color scheme e Radar Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between Dark colors indicate low levels light colors indicate high ones Grayscale 10dBm Shows the results in shades of gray Dark gray indicates low levels light gray indi cates high ones The Value Range of the Color Map If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram you can optimize the displayed value range so it becomes easier to distinguish between values that are close together and only parts of interest are displayed at all The Shape and Focus of the Color Curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever if a certain area of the value range is to be visualized in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the color curve R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of t
336. lected result display depends on the evaluation basis Return values lt Frames gt The maximum number of frames depends on the history depth Range 1 to history depth Increment 1 Retrieving Results Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode LAY REPL 2 SGR Replaces the result display in window 2 by a spectrogram DISP WIND2 EVAL REG Defines the analysis region as the evaluation basis for the spec trogram in window 2 CALC SGR FRAM COUN Queries the number of frames in the spectrogram based on the analysis region Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt LENGth Queries the trace length for the specified trace in the specified window Return values lt TraceLength gt Number of measurement points for the trace Example DISP WIND TRAC LENG Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA lt Trace gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results Query parameters lt Trace gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 TRACe5 TRACe6 SGRam SPECtrogram Determines which trace results are returned If no trace parameter is provided with the query trace 1 is assumed RST TRACe1 Example TRAC DATA TRACe2 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Usage Query only TRACe lt n g
337. les it is not window specific These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed Result Range Table Config Parameter Scale Units Frequency Deviation Parameters State Index Average Phase Deviation Table Hop Begin Peak Export ek S Phase Deviation Dwell Time RMS Phase Deviation Switching Time Average E State Frequency Nominal Minimum Power B E Average Frequency Maximum Power Ie E Hop State Deviation On Average Power Relative Frequency Hop to Hop Power Ripple Frequency Deviation Peak Frequency Deviation GU EI Select the parameters to be included in the table and the required unit scaling if avail able For a description of the individual parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 44 chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe COLumn on page 262 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe COLumn on page 267 Table Export Settings Table results can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications Table export settings can be configured in the Result Configuration dia log box in the Table Configuration tab in the vertical Table Export tab The settings are window specific and only available for result tables R amp S FSW K60 Analysis Demod Config Table Config Par
338. lf for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 99 4 10 4 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external device the trigger sig nal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S FSW Trigger output The R amp S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig ger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW i
339. lity to remove noise from the Frequency Deviation trace is using a video filter with a smaller VBW 1 From the Bandwidth menu select FM Video BW 2 Asthe FM Video Bandwidth select Low Pass 196 BW Note the impact on the Frequency Deviation trace Settling effects on the hop FM are now clearly visible mm PEINE MV RN MCN RN NUUS User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 169 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples 1 Hop Results Hoi State Dwell Switching Avg Max FM RMS FM Avg FM ID d i Index i Time Time Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation e ms ms kHz kHz kHz 111 40 S Hop Spectrogram E 1 243510051 ms 1001 pts H 1 443540049 ms CF 4 0205 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 5 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 9 5 Effect of the FM video bandwidth To analyze settling effects by defining a result range Another possibility to analyze the settling effects is by defining a result range Move the result range to the hop begin to see the settling in more detail 1 From the Meas Config menu select Result Config 2 Inthe Result Range tab set Automatic Range Scaling to Off 3 Set the reference point of the result range to Rise 4 Set the result range Length to 100 us Note that fewer spectrogram frames may be calculated as the result range length gets smaller 1 Hop Results State Hop Dwell Switching Avg Max FM RMS FM Avg FM Begin Time Time Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation GIO ms ms kHz kHz Ho
340. loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 191 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 191 Write to lt CVL table name gt lt Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 85 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 198 Managing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1 direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Input Output and Frontend Settings New Tal ROOTED T 86 o KT EE 86 DELEI E a
341. m Za Cem 100 0 Ref Value 90 0 dBm Sess sig 1 Full RF Spectrum To display this dialog box do one of the following Press the AMPT key then select the Scale Config softkey Result Configuration e From the Overview select Result Configuration then switch to the Y Scaling tab Automatic EE e DEE 127 PUG SOAS ONE M R 127 Absolute Sealing Min Max Values nce ttl ot te tate x tete eras 127 Relative Scaling Reference per Division 127 eebe 127 M bie NE went a et rTenY 128 m i 128 Spectrogram Re ln e ME 128 EE 128 L Ref Level Pasion e 128 Automatic Grid Scaling The y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement settings and results continuously Note Tip To update the scaling automatically once when this setting for continuous scaling is off use the Auto Scale Once on page 127 button or the softkey in the AUTO SET menu Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 295 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 295 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values Define the scal
342. mand queries Maximum Phase Deviation from the Result Table Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Deviation Peak on page 48 SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt Retrieving Results SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the Maximum Phase Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP PHASe RMSPm lt QueryRange gt This command queries the RMS Phase Deviation from the Result Table Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Deviation RMS on page 49 SENSe HOP PHASe RMSPm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe RMSPm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe RMSPm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe RMSPm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt R
343. marker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 152 CALCula
344. mber 0 With the next measurement the pre vious frame is moved further down in the diagram until the maximum number of cap tured frames is reached The display is updated continuously during the measurement and the measured trace data is stored Spectrogram displays are continued even after single measurements unless they are cleared manually The frames for each individual sweep are separated by colored lines spectrogram display by maximizing the window using the Split Maximize key Alternatively use a spectrogram based on the analysis region and decrease the size of the region to zoom into the data of interest See also chapter 4 6 Zooming and Shift ing Results on page 26 The scaling of the time axis y axis is not configurable However you can enlarge the Tracking absolute time timestamps Alternatively to the frame count the absolute time that is a timestamp at which a frame was captured can be displayed While the measurement is running the time stamp shows the system time In single measurement mode or if the measurement is stopped the timestamp shows the time and date at the end of the measurement Thus the individual frames can be identified by their timestamp or their frame count When active the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number in the diagram footer see figure 4 14 Displaying individual frames The spectrogram diagram contains all stored frames since it was last cleared
345. mote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous on page 299 Statistical Evaluation If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set you can define how many hops or chirp rates are included in the statistical evaluation For details see chapter 4 8 3 Trace Statistics on page 32 Selected Hop Selected Chirp vs All Hops All Chirps Statistical Evaluation Defines which hops chirps are included in the statistical evaluation Selected hop Only the selected hop chirp from each sweep capture is included in chirp the statistical evaluation All Hops All measured hops chirps from each sweep capture are included in Chirps the statistical evaluation Remote command SENSe STATistic TYPE on page 300 Trace Data Export Configuration Sweep Average Count Statistical Evaluation Defines the number of measurements to be performed in the single sweep mode Val ues from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one measurement is performed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 300 Maximum number of trace points Statistical Evaluation If the number of samples within the result range see chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 120 is larger than this value the trace data is reduced to the defined maxi mum number of trace points using the selected detector For details see also chapter 4 8 1 Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector
346. mple 1 01 2 1 Q 0 2 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 LIES Gti t2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 1I21 QI2112 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10oat32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands Transient Analysis SENSe WINDow n7 DE Tector t FUNCtion orto rentrer teet enne 299 IGENZGe TIuINDow nz JD Tector zGlEUNGonl AUTO 200 SENSe WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram DETector FUNCtion sse 304 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth BEMOG onere iere cavern canceataaeen eege eege 222 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow n RATiO ec ce erence scent cece tenis iyis 224 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow n RESolution csset 224 SENSe GHIRp EREQuency AVGFEm AVERAge tutte ettet reper etuer cin 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MAXimUtm 2 tanti nett t te tnter a 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MINimu tm 2 cts tkt tent the i tr ea cen 354 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency
347. mum PEAK cessisse enne nnne 315 CAL Culate nzM Abker zmz MiNmum RICH 315 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 153 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual op
348. n AB ebOWer MlINPower nennen nnne CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe POWer PWRRipple essen eene CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe RESUlts Ges CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe STATe ALL STATe essent enne CALCulate n HOPDetection TAbleztATelNlex nnne rennen eren nnne CALOCulate n HOPDetection TABleziAiezfAtreouencn eene 272 CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe TIMing ALL STATe de CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing BEGin erret tenth rne CALCulate n HOPDetection TABES TIMING DWEL nnne CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABL TIMing SWITORING ivssiivsisirrriidiis iseni iiia CALGulate lt sn HOPDetection TO Tal 52 utr nr a a EES Nia nor rn ER tiens 336 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF CALGCu latesn gt MARKere MA El CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz LINK TOMAbkercmz eene tnt nennt i aN EnA 308 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mz MAvimumlEET AA 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CALCulate sn MARKer m MAXimu m RIGEIL caeci a erneute ee Lar eet EA EEA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimUMILEF T iine ntpote ette e deed CALCulatesn MARKer m MINim rm NEXT acuit rre p CEA ENEE ER REO CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt GALCulate n MARKer m MlINimum BEANK 32 nuntii ntn tn nnns GALCulatesn MARKer
349. n Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 6 5 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 220 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 220 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 221 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 221 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA MSRT operating mode It has a similar effect as t
350. n See Length on page 115 CALCulate n HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin Time Defines the beginning of the measurement range as an offset in seconds from the hop start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 238 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC HOPD POW OFFS 50 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer OFFSet END time Defines the end of the measurement range as an offset in seconds from the hop end This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 238 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC HOPD POW OFFS 50 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency power measurement range The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant 11 4 10 Setting parameters Reference Example Example Manual operation Configuring Transient Analysis CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range is defined in reference to the hop ris ing or falling edge see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 238 and CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetect
351. n See Record Length on page 109 SENSe SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command defines the sample rate for the current measurement Note that the sample rate and the measurement bandwidth are interdependent see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 222 For information on supported sample rates and bandwidths see the data sheet Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 100 Hz to depends on installed options RST maximum allowed Example SRATe 100e6 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 109 Bandwidth Settings Useful commands for bandwidth settings described elsewhere SENSe SEWEep FFT WINDow TYPE on page 305 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution on page 302 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO on page 303 SENSe MTIMe on page 222 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 222 SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE on page 239 11 4 7 Configuring Transient Analysis Remote commands exclusive to bandwidth settings SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDOW lt N gt RAT O tne 224 ISENGe IDANDwidtlDWIDUDTWINDow nzlRE Solution 224 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow lt n gt RATio Bandwidth Ratio This command sets
352. n only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the
353. n values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel Analyzing Transient Effects The result of this command is identical to the 1 3 yout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 11 6 2 Defining the Evaluation Basis Depending on the measurement task not all of the measured data in the capture buffer may be of interest In some cases it may be useful to restrict analysis to a specific user definable region or to a selected individua
354. nais 216 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port cessere 216 RRE E SEQUence LEV E 217 TRIGger SEQuence L EVelIG POWSL 2 nota iet itu azza concu tara cre aga pee vue Vk aee aga aeu ED 217 TRIGger SEQuence LEVekRF POWE P nae ror rh RR ERE RR Enea EES 217 TRIGger SEQuence iSLOPS6 E 217 TRIGger SEQuence SO BI 218 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 105 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters Reg RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 105 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 106 TRIGger
355. nal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 188 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 189 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW e
356. name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter Index1 Index2 Position This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the brSPlay WINDowcn SIZE on page 250 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flic
357. ne SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 5 Region FM Time Domain Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector mode 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation Time domain e Start and stop time of data acquisition e Number of data points e Time displayed per division Frequency domain Center frequency e Number of data points Bandwidth displayed per division Measurement bandwidth Understanding the Display Information Spectrogram e Center frequency e Number of data points e Measurement bandwidth Selected frame number Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress o
358. ng an individual hop or chirp allows you to analyze or compare characteristic values in detail Which evaluation basis is available for which result display is indicated in table 5 1 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics displays The selected hop chirp see Select Hop Select Chirp on page 130 is indi cated by a blue bar The hop chirp index as displayed in the result tables is indicated at the bottom of each bar Detected hops chirps are indicated by green bars along the x axis in graphical result 4 Region Phase Deviation Time Domain 14P Clrw 0 0s 1001 pts 300 0 us 3 0 ms 6 Hop Results AG Dwell Avg Freq Dev Freq Dev ID No Time Frequency Peak i ms kHz kHz 0 100 36000 224 2244 88 100 3 3 0 100 Fig 4 8 Example of detected hops with hop index in graphical result display and result table 4 5 Analysis Region The analysis region determines which of the captured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen By default the entire capture buffer data is defined as the analysis region However you can select a specific frequency and time region which is of inter est for analysis The results can then be restricted to this region see chapter 7 3 Evaluation Basis on page 129 Note however that only one analysis region can be defined All result displays that are restricted to the analysis region thus have the same data basis rum PEINE VV RDUM NON C RN NUS User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 23 R
359. ng the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured I Q data to the specified file 11 10 11 11 11 11 1 Status Reporting System Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application uses only the registers provided by the base system For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to perform transient analysis in a remote environment Note that some of the used commands may not be necessary as they define default values but are included to demonstrate their use e Programming Example Performing a Basic Transient Analysis Measurement 372 e Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement 373 e Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement 375 e Programming Example Analyzing Parameter Distribution 378 e Programming Example Analyzing Parameter Trends 378 Programming Exampl
360. nge SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACel 11 4 1 3 Input from UO Data Files The input for measurements can be provided from UO data files The commands required to configure the use of such files are described here 11 4 1 4 Configuring Transient Analysis For details see chapter 4 10 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 39 Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere INPut SELect on page 190 Remote commands exclusive to input from UO data files hi Malizig vg E HT 204 INPut FILE PATH lt FileName gt This command selects the UO data file to be used as input for further measurements The UO data must have a specific format as described in chapter A 2 I O Data File Format iq tar on page 381 For details see chapter 4 10 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 39 Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file The file extension is iq tar Example INP FILE PATH C R_S Instr user data iq tar Uses UO data from the specified file as input Usage Setting only Manual operation See Select Q Data File on page
361. nit s Manual operation See Position on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 11 8 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only In MSRT operating mode only the MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRT applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRT applica tions For the Transient Analysis application the comman
362. nsures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 189 Settings for Input from UO Data Files Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt IQ file or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt IQ file 6 3 1 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings af Spectrum Input Source ME ao Frequency Input File Digital IQ C R_S Instr user predefined D_Waveform iq tar Select File Saved by FSW K Comment Date amp time 2015 02 18T 11 16 53 Sample rate 204 8 MHz Number of samples 1228800 Duration of signal 6ms Number of channels 1 IQ File For details see chapter 4 10 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 39 VO Inp t SITE 79 Select VO Data e oett tid ed stets edited Dr Pa ar E RR RR EY Re 79 UO Input File State Activates input from the selected UO input file If enabled the application performs measurements on the data from this file Thus most measurement settings related to data acquisition a
363. nt is required only once after setup If alignment was performed successfully the alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope Thus alignment need only be repeated if one of the following applies e Anew oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW e Anew cable is used between the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 205 Configuring Transient Analysis e Anew firmware is installed on the oscilloscope Return values lt State gt Returns the state of the second alignment step ON 1 Alignment was successful OFF 0 Alignment was not yet performed successfully Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC ALIG STEP Result 1 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE Returns the date of alignment of the IF OUT 2 GHZ to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values lt Date gt Returns the date of alignment Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC DATE Result 2014 02 28 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN Returns the identification string of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW Return values lt IDString gt Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz RTO 1316 1000k14 200153 2 45 1 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 91 SYSTem COMMuni
364. nzM Abkercm GGbamG Atea annehmen enses 318 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea essent 318 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GGbRam 2 MAximumfPDEAKT eee 319 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK essen 319 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK nnn 319 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MlNimum PEAK eese 319 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWVe sse 319 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GbECirooram v MAximum AbDOVe 319 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum DEI ow n 319 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOW eese 319 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GGbRamvMANimum NENT 319 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT sess 319 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK cesse 320 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GbECirooram v MAximumfPDEAkRT nenen nnne nnnneee 320 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum ABOWe essen 320 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWe eeeeeeeeeeee e 320 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELOW nn 320 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELOw eese 320 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum NEXT sseeseseseneeeene rennen 320 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEX
365. o averages for Result trace statistics over range 1 RR 2 P all hops chirps Capture Sweep count 5 1 E 2 6 3 No averages for trace statistics over selected hop chirp 3 Fig 4 13 Trace statistics number of averaging steps R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 9 Working with Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time traces the R amp S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies Example MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBrr Att 10dB SWT 41 8 ps 1 Frequency Sweep CF 64 0 MHz 1001 pts 2 0 MHz Span 20 0 MHz 1Pk Cirw Frame 0 In this example you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of the R amp S FSW compared to the standard spectrum display Since the signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 33 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 9 1 1 Frequency
366. of measurement channels that can be activa ted simultaneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe MTIMe on page 222 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of measurements to be performed in the single sweep mode Val ues from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one measurement is performed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 300 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window 6 10 Adjusting Settings Automatically Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more details see chapter 4 9 1 Time Frames on page 34 For more information see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 16 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 301 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corre
367. oint in the trace Measurement point n Meas point n 1 Video Signal AVG 7 SAMPLE RMS MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK di MIN PEAK The trace detector for the individual traces can be selected manually by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSW The detectors of the R amp S FSW are implemented as pure digital devices All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is inde pendent of the detector combination used for different traces Auto detector If the R amp S FSW is set to define the appropriate detector automatically the detector is set depending on the selected trace mode Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Max Hold Positive Peak Min Hold Negative Peak Average Sample Peak Trace Evaluation Trace mode View Detector Blank 4 8 2 Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode If several measurements are performed one after the other or continuous measure ments are performed the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed After each measurement the trace mode determines whether e the data is frozen View e the data is hidden Blank e the data is replaced by new values Clear Write e the data is replaced selectively Max Hold Min Hold Average O Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The trace mode also determines the detector type if the d
368. ommand SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe on page 205 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 90 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration TCPIP Address or Computer name When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the entire measurement via the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector and an oscilloscope as well as both instruments are controlled by the R amp S FSW Thus the instruments must be connected via LAN and the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope must be defined on the R amp S FSW By default the TCPIP address is expected To enter the computer name toggle the 423 ABC button to ABC As soon as a name or address is entered the R amp S FSW attempts to establish a con nection to the oscilloscope If it is detected the oscilloscope s identity string is queried and displayed in the dialog box The alignment status is also displayed see Align ment on page 91 Note The IP address computer name is maintained after a PRESET and is transfer red between applications Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN on page 206 Alignment Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Alignment An initial alignment of the output to the oscilloscope is required once after setup It need only be repeated if a new oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW or if a new firmware i
369. on eeeeesees 13 Windows Adding remote Closing remote Configuring EET aeninESGS Layout remote Maximizing remote cete 250 Querying TEMOTE rere reete taii 253 Replacing remote Splitting remote Types remote 2 etes X X axis Parameter Distribution sesessssssss 124 Parameter trend susciter reb nie ded 126 X value lE clam 146 Y Y axis Parameter Distribution r Zastene n 124 Parametet trend eroe ttn rm PEN eaae 126 Scaling Scaling remote nrc dte eite 295 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating se 78 Activating Deactivating remote 189 Z ZOOMIN ecc 26 154 Activating remote EE 326 Analysis FeglOm EE 25 Area Multiple mode remote 326 AreaXremole nico cn e ten b e 8 325 Deactivalirig risici terrre erret 154 Multi PIG MODES ee reete 153 Multiple mode remote 926 327 cilc e 325 Restoring original display eseesssss 154 Single mode Single mode remote AAA 325
370. on For example you can capture UO data using the UO Analyzer application store it to a file and then analyze the signal parameters for that data later using the Pulse applica tion if available The I Q data must be stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see chapter A 2 I Q Data File Format ig tar on page 381 As opposed to importing data from an UO data file using the import functions provided by some R amp S FSW applications e g the I Q Analyzer or the R amp S FSW VSA applica tion the data is not only stored temporarily in the capture buffer where it overwrites the current measurement data and is in turn overwritten by a new measurement Instead the stored UO data remains available as input for any number of subsequent measurements Furthermore the temporary data import requires the current mea surement settings in the current application to match the settings that were applied when the measurement results were stored possibly in a different application When the data is used as an input source however the data acquisition settings in the cur rent application attenuation center frequency measurement bandwidth sample rate can be ignored As a result these settings cannot be changed in the current applica tion Only the measurement time can be decreased in order to perform measurements on an extract of the available data from the beginning of the file only When using inpu
371. on See Automatic Range Scaling on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt RESult REFerence lt Reference gt Defines the reference point for positioning the result range The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt Reference gt RISE CENTer FALL RISE The result range is defined in reference to the rising edge CENTer The result range is defined in reference to the center of the hop chirp top FALL The result range is defined in reference to the falling edge RST CENTer Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Result Range Reference Point on page 121 Analyzing Transient Effects 11 6 4 Selecting the Hop Chirp The selected hop chirp determines which results are calculated and displayed These commands are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed CALC Ulat e lt n gt CHR Detection SE Lette csc icona reca cec reta eee crede EYE tete re anen Nani EAS 261 CAL Culate nzHObDetechon SEL eched eee nnne nne nn an 261 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection SELected lt ChirpNo gt Defines the individual chirp for which results are calculated and displayed Parameters for setting and query lt ChirpNo gt Example CALC CHRD SEL 3 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Prog
372. on on page 128 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays Suffix lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT Default unit dBm Manual operation See Ref Value on page 128 11 6 9 Configuring Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Analyzing Transient Effects RE SEET E Ne le KI 298 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectMODE HCOhNtnuous nnne 299 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essen nennen 299 SENSE JiuiNDow nz JDETechorzGfFUNGCHon nene 299 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO sessi 300 ISENSe MEASure e EE 200 E CEET 200 SENSe SWEep COUNL cette tentent tette tette teet t tos na 300 SENSeTSWEep C OUNECURRUeF E 2 eee eru retro RE eto tht rete Een ERR RO AE Ea 301 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold
373. on CVL PORTs on page 200 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select an empty space in the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 199 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit
374. on and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 218 UO Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 218 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displaye
375. on from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp ID lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp IDs from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp NUMBer lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp numbers from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm lt QueryRange gt This command queries the Average Phase Deviation from the Result Table Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Deviation Average on page 56 SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe AVGPm SDEViation l
376. onal option R amp S FSW K60C K60H LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result MZ oz ty Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only Analyzing Transient Effects LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the
377. only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed CAL Culate nzRESut AL IGnment 258 CALCUlate sn RE SU LENG EE 259 Ee HE TEE 259 GALGulate n RESult RANGe AUTO ncanic censet enean NEEN EES a RR A Era NAP M RANA 260 CAL Culate nzREzuhtREterence essen nsn diiine nakana annann 260 CALCulate lt n gt RESult ALIGnment Reference Defines the alignment of the result range in relation to the selected reference point see CALCulate lt n gt RESult REFerence on page 260 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters Reference LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The result range starts at the hop chirp center or selected edge CENTer The result range is centered around the hop chirp center or selected edge RIGHt The result range ends at the hop chirp center or selected edge RST CENTer Example CALC RES ALIG LEFT Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Alignment on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt RESult LENGth Time This command defines the length or duration of the result range Note this command is only available for manual range scaling see CALCulate lt n gt RESult RANGe AUTO on page 260
378. or a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e oS VANES cT eH VIE EUM 181 le BEE 182 e hargcter Da E 182 e Character EE 183 UBISCI D e EE 183 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numer
379. ote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 117 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuo
380. p Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm lt PowAvg gt Average power level measured during a hop Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm lt PowRip gt Power level measured during the hop ripple time Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm Example CALC3 HOPD TABLe 1 10 Result Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Usage Query only Retrieving Results Manual operation See State Index on page 45 See Hop Begin on page 45 See Dwell Time on page 46 See Switching Time on page 46 See State Frequency Nominal on page 46 See Average Frequency on page 46 See Hop State Deviation on page 46 See Relative Frequency Hop to Hop on page 47 See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 47 See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 47 See Frequency Deviation Average on page 48 See Phase Deviation Peak on page 48 See Phase Deviation RMS on page 49 See Phase Deviation Average on page 49 See Minimum Power on page 50 See Maximum Power on page 50 See Average Power on page 50 See Power Ripple on page
381. p a No Index 1 1 094159963 ms _ CF 4 0205 GHz 1001 pts Frame 0 Fig 9 6 Hop displays for a result range at the beginning of the hop User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 170 Example Chirped FM Signal 9 2 Example Chirped FM Signal The following example demonstrates how to detect chirps and how to analyze an indi vidual chirp The measurement is performed using the following devices An R amp S FSW with application firmware R amp S FSW K60 Transient Analysis K60C Chirped Transient Analysis and bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 e A vector signal generator e g R amp S SMF Fig 9 7 Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMF Frequency 4 GHz Level 30 dBm Channels Linear FM up down chirp channel 40 MHz trapezoidal shape Sinusoidal interference on FM with 10 kHz deviation and FM spike in up chirp with 1 MHz deviation Chirp length 100 us chirp rate 800 kHz us Sample rate 100 MHz Frequency Modulation Source uF Generator 1 ur Generator 2 Deviation l 40 000 MHz 8 000 HI H Ratio FM 2 1 0 02 DI Normal Fig 9 8 R amp S SMF frequency modulation configuration for chirped FM signal example R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Settings in the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application To detect chirps in an FM signal 1 Preset the R amp S FSW Set the center frequency to 4 GHz Set the reference level to
382. parameters the system returns its short form 11 1 6 4 11 1 6 5 11 2 11 3 Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Common Suffixes In the Transient Analysis application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m 14 16 Marker n 1 16 Window or Evaluat
383. pecified Headers RST ON Analyzing Transient Effects Headers ALL STATe BEGin LENGth RATE CHERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm AVGFm MINPower MAXPower AVGPower PWRRipple AVPHm MXPHm RMSPm All listed parameters are displayed or hidden in the table results depending on the State parameter ALL See chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 STATe Chirp state BEGin Chirp Begin LENGth Chirp length RATe Chirp rate CHERror Chirp state deviation FREQuency Average frequency MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation AVGPower Average power MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power PWRRipple Power ripple AVPHm Average phase deviation MXPHm Maximum phase deviation RMSPm RMS phase deviation Example CALC CHRD TABL COL ON CHRNo STATe Provides results for the chirp number and chirp state only Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency ALL STATe lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled all frequency parameters are included in the result tables see Frequency parameters on page 53 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameter
384. performs a sweep and program is synchronized waits on completion of the sweep CALC AR FREQ BAND 10 MHZ R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application starts re calculating results with a new analysis region bandwidth but program does not wait until completion of the new calculation it continues immediately INIT SYNC The program now waits until any pending auto refresh calcula tions are finished before continuing Event 11 6 Analyzing Transient Effects SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Analyzing Transient Effects The following commands are required to analyze transient effects in a measured sig nal Conniguring the Result
385. ple See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency measurement range The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters Reference CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range is defined in reference to the hop ris ing or falling edge see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 236 and CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 237 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the hop Example CALC HOPD FREQ REF CENTer Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Reference on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer LENGth Percent Defines the length of the measurement range in percent of the dwell time This com mand is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 238 Configuring Transient Analysis The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Percent Example CALC HOPD POW LENG 2e 4 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operatio
386. plied to a hop chirp based result display the size or position of the result range are changed see chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 120 This means that ALL result displays based on the analysis region or hop chirp result range are re evaluated after a data zoom or shift function is applied in any window This includes result tables which may take some time to re calculate Close the result tables during a data shift zoom to improve the screen update speed User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 26 Measurement Range Use the data zoom or shift functions in the full spectrum or spectrogram displays and analyze the data sequentially or hop by hop chirp by chirp in the other result displays 4 7 Measurement Range In order to calculate frequency phase or power results in frequency hopping or chirped signals more accurately it may be useful not to take the entire dwell time of the hop or length of the chirp into consideration but only a certain range within the dwell time length Thus it is possible to eliminate settling effects for instance For such cases a measurement range can be defined for frequency phase and power results in relation to specific hop or chirp characteristics Hop Begin Hop End Frequency Hz Dwell Time Hop Center Nominal Hop Freq Time s Offset x Fig 4 11 Measurement range parameters for hopped signals Similarly for chirped signals a measurement range can be defined for
387. quence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 247 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 249 Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 249 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 249 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User
388. quency Deviation Average on page 55 Default unit kHz lt PMDevMax gt Maximum deviation of the chirp phase from the nominal chirp phase as defined in the Chirp States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Phase Deviation Peak on page 55 Default unit kKHz lt PMDevRMS gt RMS deviation of the chirp phase from the nominal linear chirp phase as defined in the Chirp States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Phase Deviation RMS on page 55 Default unit kHz lt PMDevAvg gt Average deviation of the chirp phase from the nominal linear chirp phase as defined in the Chirp States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Phase Deviation Average on page 56 Default unit kHz lt PowMin gt Minimum power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm Retrieving Results lt PowMax gt Maximum power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm lt PowAvg gt Average power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is
389. r and then the Distribution tab Note that this tab is only available for windows with a Parameter Distribution evaluation KEE 124 co mE 124 Histogram IEN 125 X Axis Defines the parameter for which the values are displayed on the x axis For a descrip tion of the parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 44 chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 Remote command CALCulate n DISTribution X on page 280 Y Axis Defines the scaling of the y axis 7 2 3 2 Result Configuration Count Number of hops chirps in which the value occurred Occurrence Number of occurrences in percent of all measured values Remote command CALCulate n DISTribution Y on page 280 Histogram Bins Number of columns on the x axis i e the number of measurement value ranges for which the occurrences are determined Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution NBINs on page 280 Parameter Trend Configuration The parameter trend result displays allow you to visualize changes in a specific param eter for all measured hops chirps within the current capture buffer For each parameter trend window you can configure which measured parameter is to be displayed on the x axis and which on the y axis Res LO q uon H t3 Visa Cnarzktriim Transient Analvsi Result Range Table Config Parameter Scale Units Swap X and Y Axis Distribution ose 3 Parameter Trend H The Parameter Trend settings are availab
390. rage d For trace 3 select the Mode Min Hold e Define an average count of 1000 The display now shows the trace statistics as output of an auto peak detector of one chirp 4 For statistics over multiple chirps you must define a common result range to make sure that statistics are calculated over time intervals of a constant length a From the Meas Config menu select Result Config b In the Result Range tab set Automatic Range Scaling to Off c Set the result range Alignment to the Center of the chirp d Set the result range Length to 90 ps After averaging 1000 chirps you see not only the the FM spike on the max trace but also a sinusoidal interference on the average trace 5 Chirp FM Error Time Domain 1 Max 2 Avg 3 Min Fig 9 13 Min average max traces for chirp Frequency Deviation To limit the noise bandwidth using a video filter The noise bandwidth can be reduced using a video filter 1 Disable trace averaging for the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display a Press the TRACE key then select Trace Config b Fortrace 1 select the Mode C r Write c Fortrace 2 and 3 select the Mode Blank 2 From the Bandwidth menu select FM Video Bandwidth 3 Asthe FM Video Bandwidth select Low Pass 196 BW Note the different behavior of limiting the noise bandwidth by VBW filtering and trace averaging User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 175 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Blu
391. rage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 367 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function the entire histo gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded For large history buffers the export operation may take some time Note Secure user mode Marker Settings In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote comman
392. rameter Distribution result display for chirp power parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt AVGPower MAXPower MINPower PWRRipple AVGPower Average power MINPower Minimum power MAXPower Maximum power PWRRipple Power ripple Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters Y Axis COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of chirps in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured chirps in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp STATe lt XAxis gt lt YAxis gt Configures the Parameter Distribution result display for chirp state parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt INDex Chirp state index Setting parameters lt YAxis gt COUNt OCCurrence Parameter to be displayed on the y axis COUNt Number of chirps in which the parameter value occurred OCCurance Percentage of all measured chirps in which the parameter value occurred RST COUNt CALCulate lt n gt DISTribution CHIRp TIMing XAxis lt YAxis gt Configures the Parameter Distribution result display for chirp timing parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt XAxis gt BEGin LENGth RATE Chirp parameter to be displayed on the x axis For a description of the available parameters see chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 BEGin Ch
393. rameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the Chirp Maximum Power from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Maximum Power on page 56 Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer MAXPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the Chrip Maximum Power from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp POWer MINPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the Chirp Minimum Power from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usag
394. rameters tab define parameters for which a trend or distribution is to be displayed e Inthe Scale and Units tabs configure the value range for the y axis in the individual result displays See chapter 7 2 4 Y Axis Scaling on page 126 To start the measurement select one of the following e RUN SINGLE key e Single Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu The defined number of sweeps are performed then the measurement is stopped While the measurement is running the RUN SINGLE key is highlighted To abort the measurement press the RUN SINGLE key again The key is no longer high lighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps or calculate hop statistics on the Traces tab see chapter 7 4 Trace Settings on page 130 e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab see chapter 7 8 Marker Settings on page 144 e Configure the Spectrogram display or FFT parameters on the Spectrogram tab see chapter 7 6 Spectrogram Settings on page 135 13 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c D
395. ramming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Select Hop Select Chirp on page 130 CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection SELected lt HopNo gt Defines the individual hop for which results are calculated and displayed Parameters for setting and query lt HopNo gt Example CALC HOPD SEL 3 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Select Hop Select Chirp on page 130 11 6 5 Table Configuration The following commands define which statistical and characteristic values are deter mined for measured hops chirps These commands are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed e GChirp Resulis deem hee erae cc do pedi tee ENEE 261 o Hop EE 267 11 6 5 1 Chirp Results CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechon AB eCOt vumm 262 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechionTAPBletRtOuencv ALLTSTATel esre rne ne 264 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechion AB etRtOuencv AVGEm eren 264 Analyzing Transient Effects CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechon AB etRtOuencv CHEbRror nnne 264 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency FREQuency eese 264 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXFm esses eene 264 CALOCulate n CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSFm essere 264 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechionTAPBlebHuAGe ALLTSTATel ennenen eeeeeeersesrsren nn
396. ransient Analysis 178 Introduction oie nete IIT ege ege 178 Common SUTTIKOS ossis eean ae ERESSE AAEE E REENE EEEN E ENRETE EREA 183 Activating Transient AnalySiS sssssssssenunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmn 183 Configuring Transient Analysis eese nennen 187 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eene nennen 243 Analyzing Transient Effects eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenen nennen nennen nenne nnn 249 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 327 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 329 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 4 11 9 Retrieving Results eee trennen uno arric unu draaiend naaraana 330 11 10 Status Reporting System eese essen ee nne nne nnn nennen nnn 372 11 11 Programming Examples sese nnne nnne rne nennen 372 A TROT CCN e M 380 A 1 Reference ASCII File Export Format seeeeesseeeeeeeeee enne enne 380 A2 MQ Data File Format iq tar eerte rnnt inns 381 List of Remote Commands Transient Analysis 387 399 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This Transient Analysis User Manual provides all the information
397. rce External Mixer Mixer Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings Input Source Radio Frequency Mixer Settings Basic Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start RF Stop Handover Freq RF Overrange Preset Band Mixer Settings Range Harmonic Type Harmonic Order Conversion Loss Table Extenial Mka fe uae rt DAAGS M Y REN Y Med e eens 81 EE RF cio o E 81 Handover e E EN En Le EE EN RF Te EE EN Preset Band CEA Ee ie a a E E 81 IMMO I 82 Mixer Settings Harmonics Confouratton 82 ERIE NUNT 82 B io EE NENNT 82 L Harmonie MN RENE 82 L Conversionloes ener ttes rna 82 Input Output and Frontend Settings External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 81 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 82 For details on available frequency ranges see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuenc
398. rding to the data acquisition settings Signal Models If the additional firmware options R amp S FSW K60H or K60C are installed the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application supports different signal models for which similar parameters are characteristic e Frequency MODDING eerte ri tertie edhe a Ek Ea 19 Fregueney elio E 21 e Automatic vs Manual Hop Chirp State Deiecton nesr rees 22 Frequency Hopping Some digital data transmission standards employ a frequency hopping technique in which a carrier signal is rapidly switched among many frequency channels Discrete frequencies and continuous modulation are characteristic of this signal model R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 3 Full Spectrogram gt 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 110 Fig 4 4 Typical spectrogram of a frequency hopping signal Analyzing such signals includes the following challenges e Detecting the currently used carrier frequency and a possible offset e Determining the duration the signal stays at one frequency and the time it takes to Switch to another e Measuring the average power level e Demodulating the signal correctly The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application with the additional R amp S FSW K60H option installed can automatically detect frequency hops in a measured signal and determine characteristic hop parameters Both pulsed and continuous wave hopping signals can be analyzed Assuming a frequency hopping sign
399. re very similar as well Settling Tolerance T Chirp End m Chirp Begin hirp Length Chirp Rate vs Time Chirp Rate Hz us eieis diu lt Nominal Chirp Rate Time s Fig 4 7 Parameters required to detect chirps In the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application for a chirp signal the derivation of the captured signal data is calculated before further analysis From there processing is identical for both signal models Automatic vs Manual Hop Chirp State Detection By default the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application automatically detects the existing hop chirp states in a pre measurement For an initial overview of the signal at hand this detection is usually sufficient For more accurate results particularly if the input signal is known in advance the nominal frequency or chirp values can be defined manually Basis of Evaluation Depending on the measurement task not all of the measured data in the capture buffer may be of interest In some cases it may be useful to restrict analysis to a specific user definable region or to a selected individual chirp or hop This makes analysis more efficient and the display clearer Automatic detection of hops or chirps for example is always based on a restricted analysis region Numeric results for characteristic parameters as well as statistical results are also calculated on this restricted basis For graphical displays selecti
400. res the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop state parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt INDex STAFrequency INDex Hop index STAFrequency State frequency nominal Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP STATe Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop state parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt INDex STAFrequency INDex Hop index STAFrequency State frequency nominal Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP TIMing lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop trends over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters lt YAxis gt BEGin DWELI SWITching BEGin Hop Begin DWELI Hop dwell time SWITching Switching time lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Hop Begin Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP TIMing X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop timing parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt BEGin DWELI SWITching BEGin Hop Begin DWELI Hop dwell time SWITching Switching time Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd HOP TIMing Y lt YAxis gt Configure
401. rker Settings Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 308 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 311 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 309 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 311 Frame for Spectrograms only Spectrogram frame number the marker is assigned to The most recently swept frame is number 0 all previous frames have negative numbers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 318 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 308 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 311 Reference Marker Define
402. rmation on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product F GW bm Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation DVD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Firmware Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following tex
403. rnal mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters Band KA QJUJ VI EIJWI F D GJ Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 81 Table 11 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Range 1 2 on page 82 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 82 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type
404. rogram Markers and delta markers are shaped like diamonds in the spectrogram They are only displayed in the spectrogram if the marker position is inside the visible area of the spectrogram If more than two markers are active the marker values are displayed in a separate marker table In the spectrum result display the markers and their frequency and level values 1 are displayed as usual Additionally the frame number is displayed to indicate the position of the marker in time 2 M1 1 24 01 dBm Frequency and Power Level hr GE MHz of the Marker D2 1 22 31 dB 4 50 286 00 MHz Frame Number of the Marker In the spectrogram result display you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame Special search functions are provided for spectrogram markers In the spectrum result display only the markers positioned on the currently selected frame are visible In Continuous Sweep mode this means that only markers posi tioned on frame 0 are visible To view markers that are positioned on a frame other than frame 0 in the spectrum result display you must stop the measurement and select the corresponding frame Rece
405. rp states will not appear in the Results Table The desired hop chirp states are not detected Make sure that a sufficient number of hops chirps are inside the analysis region see Analysis Region Instead of one hop chirp several shorter hop chirps of the same hop chirp state are detected Increase the detection tolerance of the corresponding hop chirp state see Tolerance on page 73 Use a video filter with a smaller VBW see FM Video Bandwidth on page 112 Instead of one hop chirp several shorter hop chirps of a different hop chirp state are detected Adjust the detection tolerance of the corresponding hop chirp states to make sure that tolerance ranges do not overlap see Tolerance on page 73 Use a video filter with a smaller VBW see FM Video Bandwidth on page 112 One or more shorter hops chirps are detected directly before or after the desired hop chirp Specify a minimum and maximum dwell time chirp length corresponding to the desired hop chirp see Length on page 115 Spectrogram of a selected hop chirp is empty Increase the result range length see Length on page 121 11 Introduction Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis The following commands are required to perform measurements in the Transient Analysis application in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual d 11
406. rps Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing BEGin on page 266 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin on page 363 Chirp Parameters Chirp Length Timing parameters The duration of a chirp from begin to end that is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal chirp Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing LENGth on page 266 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth on page 364 Chirp Rate Timing parameters Derivative of the FM vs time trace within the frequency measurement range see chap ter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe TIMing RATE on page 266 Results CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 351 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE on page 364 Frequency parameters Chirp frequency parameters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency ALL STATe on page 264 Chirp State Deviation Frequency parameters Deviation of the detected chirp rate from the nominal chirp state in kHz us dfdev state EM at os where i fnom Nominal chirp rate corresponding to a detected or predefined hop state T Average chirp rate estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a
407. rred spike Clear shape of smooth nonlinearity without VBW filter averaging artifact Fig 9 14 Chirp Frequency Deviation clear write trace with 1 VBW filter Clear shape of spike Residual Noise on Average Trace Statistic Count 1000 A Ty Ar Mi j ji m E b uj j Al S Fig 9 15 Chirp Frequency Deviation average trace statistic count 1000 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 176 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting If the results do not meet your expectations or if problems occur during measurement try the following solutions Too many hop chirp states have been detected in auto mode 177 The desired hop chirp states are not detected ccccceccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeees 177 Instead of one hop chirp several shorter hop chirps of the same hop chirp state are detected citet ek tt d eed ec date pe cade be dia Do e dud a e enia 177 Instead of one hop chirp several shorter hop chirps of a different hop chirp state are oye m 177 One or more shorter hops chirps are detected directly before or after the desired hop CUM o 177 Spectrogram of a selected hop chirp is emp 177 Too many hop chirp states have been detected in auto mode Switch auto mode off and edit hop chirp state table manually see chapter 6 2 2 Sig nal States on page 71 Usually these unwanted hop chi
408. rrent capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Relative Frequency Hop to Hop on page 47 SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the relative hop to hop frequency from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the RMS Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 47 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the RMS Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for
409. rs on page 44 or chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH STAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 Parameter Distribution Plots a histogram of a particular parameter i e all measured parameter values from the current capture vs hop chirp count or occurrence in 96 Thus you can determine how often a particular parameter value occurs For each parameter distribution window you can configure a different parameter to be displayed This evaluation method allows you to distinguish transient and stable effects in a spe cific parameter such as a spurious frequency deviation or a fluctuation in power over several hops 3 Freq Dev RMS Distribution 1AP Clrw 350 0 kHz 50 0 kHz 850 0 kHz Note that averaging is not possible for parameter distribution traces Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PDIS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 CALCulate n DISTribution X on page 280 CALCulate n DISTribution Y on page 280 chapter 11 6 6 Configuring Parameter Distribution Displays on page 274 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 65 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results Parameter Trend Plots all measured parameter values from the current capture vs another parameter or the hop chirp state index This evaluation allows you to determine trends in a specific parameter such as a frequency deviation or a fluctuation in power over several hops For each parameter trend window you can conf
410. ruth eeng 116 140 RUN SINGLE etre e ees 116 117 140 L Length Analysis TEJON toon e aaa Measurement range TE Te Linking MAIK6erS u citta ehe e Cd See 146 149 LO Level External Mixer remote control 191 Level External Mixer AAA 84 LO feedthrough x itte recen er eh eri inei 78 Loading FUNCIONS sonis tet e eee a ee 142 M Marker Search area softkey sss 151 Search type softkey A 151 Marker legend Displaying BE 149 Marker search area Remote control 2o reete t ete 313 Marker table Evaluation method eei ettet 66 Marker te Wl Le 147 Markers lee Bue 147 Basic settings Configuration remote Control 307 Configuration softkey sssssssss 145 148 Deactivating Delta MALEK ONS eerste diese Pete e pne aA 146 Fixed reference remote control 312 Linked m ul Te acci me ep oo e sen er een E Miir aiat S te er pieces ee tee por ere EE Minimum remote control INGXE MINIMUM eer Next minimum remote control 313 Next peak Next peak remote control sss 313 Peak T Peak remote control vous Eoeltott ems geetige EET 146 POSIVOMING Mme EET Positioning remote control Querying position remote REMOTE Conlrol 5c oir ete t i et atre plex Search remote control Setting up remote control SPCCHOGLAMS ode gees e
411. rval Operating mode le MSRA applications Capture offset remote AA 328 MSRT Analysis ace ttt ae Ere ERR RR Analysis interval Operating mode Merge P MSRT applications Capture E uc ue eint Capture offset remote Multiple ZOOM rtt rent erri etch N Negative Peak detector RR teen 29 Next Minimum es Marker positionihg cx terr vt tci 153 Next Mode X SOfIKEV iecit eese Dees 150 Next Mode Y SONKEY Seeerei 150 Next Peak s Marker positiOnifig scored torri eene incita 152 Noise SOUPCO eee 39 99 O Offset Analysis Interval 5 rio int tee a FreQUEDCY Sucen EN Measurement range e Ee EE FRESUIE FANG fee Options Electronic attenuation nnne tenen 96 Eliglipass TIItet oo iir rot reitera ees 78 189 K60C K60H Te el E 97 Oscilloscope ele EN Oscilloscopes Xe E E EN Connections B2000 ae 91 Remote commands B2000 sss 204 Output Poo 209 Velo tee WEE 76 97 Configuration remote 187 208 IF frequency remote 209 IF O t Frequency enne tete 99 IF source remote 209 Noise source wie 99 99 Paiatrelers eret rer e tiec ere ten ue 38 Settings orent ne ren ete regne 97 Trigger 99 106 DIO eh 98 209 Overload RF input
412. s State RST ON Setting parameters Scaling GHZ MHZ KHZ HZ Defines the scaling for the frequency parameters Usage Setting only Manual operation See Frequency parameters on page 53 CALCulate n CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency AVGFm lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency CHERror lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency FREQuency lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency MAXFm lt State gt lt Scaling gt CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe FREQuency RMSFm lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled the specified frequency parameter is included in the result tables see Fre quency parameters on page 53 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt RST ON Setting parameters lt Scaling gt GHZ MHZ KHZ HZ Defines the scaling for the frequency parameters Manual operation See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 54 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe PHASe ALL STATe lt State gt lt Scaling gt If enabled all phase deviation parameters are included in the result tables see Phase parameters on page 55 Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TABLe RESults query
413. s on page 32 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Trace Evaluation reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label o If a trace is frozen View mode the instrument settings apart from level range and If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace 4 8 3 Trace Statistics Each trace represents an analysis of the data measured in one result range As descri bed in chapter 4 8 2 Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 31 statistical evaluations can be performed over several traces that is result ranges Which ranges and how many are evaluated depends on the configuration settings Selected hop chirp vs all hops chirps The Sweep Average Count determines how many measurements are evaluated For each measurement in turn either the selected hop chirp only that is one result range or all detected hops chirps that is possibly several result ranges can be inclu ded in the statistical evaluation Thus the overall number of averaging steps depends on the Sweep Average Count and the statistical evaluation mode N
414. s such as RF power sensors etc and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The following commands are required to configure data input and output exis c HET E Luet input from VQ Data E Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Conleurii the OUPS secare E A O A 11 4 1 1 Configuring Transient Analysis RF Input INbPutrATTenuaton PbOTechonHtEzet ense n nass sse ins nest aan 188 Eidel Te DEE 188 IERT ua 188 INP ut FIETerHEASS STATe 2 rien dddeeeke paeem ioo nin SEENEN NEE ENEE 189 INPaEFIETern YIGDS TA NEE 189 let EE 189 UNPUtS EG METEO E 190 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 77 INPut DPATh State Enabl
415. s Region If activated the width of the frequency span for the analysis region is defined as a per centage of the full capture buffer It is centered around the point defined by the Delta Frequency Remote command CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency PERCent on page 241 CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency PERCent STATe on page 241 Linked analysis time span Analysis Region If activated the length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full measurement time The time gate start is the start of the capture buffer plus an offset defined by the Time Gate Start Remote command CALCulate lt n gt AR TIM CALCulate lt n gt AR TIM PERCent on page 241 PERCent STATe on page 242 Ei qul Visualizing the Analysis Region Parameters Show Diagram Analysis Region If enabled the Data Acquisition Analysis Region dialog box shows a visualization of the parameters that define the analysis region as shown in figure 4 9 Bandwidth Settings 6 6 Bandwidth Settings The bandwidth settings are available when you select the BW or SPAN key Some of these settings are also available in the Data Acquisition and Analysis Region dialog box WW ABW RBW FFT Window 16MHz 6 MHz row Baa Blackman Harris LE 1 Full Spectrogram E pice ris C 111 EET INNEIN s ci diete emet ede de ea aaa a a a
416. s a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If the reference marker is deactivated the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 310 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Marker Settings Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 308 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 310 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 310 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on pa
417. s considered to be a hop statelchirp state These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed The Signal State table is available when you do one of the following From the Overview select Signal Description e From the MEAS CONFIG menu select Signal Description Signal Model Signal States Timing f hop states 2 Generate Hop States Start Frequency Frequency Tolerance Step Size 20 01251161 MHz 15 02346 kHz 19 99252250 MHz 15 04524 kHz 20 80951627 MHz 29 03270 kHz 20 58842873 MHz 26 85764 kHz 20 60942285 MHz 28 84589 kHz 20 78852407 MHz 27 04830 kHz Apply Global Tolerance 20 98847855 MHz 26 95725 kHz 21 00940674 MHz 28 81363 kHz Tolerance Value 20 38657022 MHz 23 14064 kHz 20 40684988 MHz 33 69997 kHz 20 19997333 MHz 49 94689 kHz 19 98250298 MHz 15 00620 kHz No of Steps Apply Frequency Offset Frequency Offset Fig 6 1 Hop States configuration dialog with additional settings Signal Model Signal States Timing Chirp States Number of chirp states 55 Auto Mode On mem State 1 00 Hz 323 29 Hz 335 29 Hz 210 10 Hz 209 58 Hz 424 26 Hz 420 97 Hz 123 20 Hz 119 79 Hz 259 66 Hz 88 53 Hz 83 34 Hz 89 12 Hz 0 1 n Ce D rd EU bh Fig 6 2 Chirp States configuration dialog For details on the individual parameters see chapter 4 3 1 Frequency Hopping on page 19 PUO MOTO p M
418. s installed on the oscilloscope a ea a a ew D d The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 91 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Alignment consists of two steps The first step requires a temporary connection from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector on the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the oscil loscope To perform the alignment select the Alignment button If necessary in particular after the firmware on the oscilloscope has been updated a self alignment is performed on the oscilloscope before the actual B2000 alignment starts This may take a few minutes If the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC are aligned successfully a new dialog box is displayed Oscilloscope CH1 to FSW REF OUT 640 MHz Please connect RTO CH1 to FSW B2000 Alignment Signal Source Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel z Se 9 iz a D a ES H Continue Alignment For the second alignment step the connector must be disconnected from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector and instead connected to the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE connector on the R amp S FSW To continue the alignment select the Continue Alignment button After the second alignment step has been completed successfully a new dialog box is displayed User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 92 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Alignmen
419. s split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 195 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 195 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Input Output and Frontend Settings Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Pre defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conver sion Loss Table tab For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 86 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 196 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 196 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 196 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 196 Basic Settings Access Overview Input Frontend Input Source External Mixer Basic Settings or INPUT OUTPUT g
420. s the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for hop timing parameters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt BEGin DWELI SWITching BEGin Hop Begin DWELI Hop dwell time SWITching Switching time Usage Setting only Analyzing Transient Effects 11 6 8 Configuring the Y Axis Scaling and Units The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These commands are described here Useful commands for configuring scaling described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 211 Remote commands exclusive to scaling the y axis CALCulatesm U NIM te 295 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe eese enne nnne nnne 295 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelAUlTO nennen 295 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelMANimum cee ce cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 296 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINIMUM ceeeceeeee eee ee eee nennen 296 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVISION ccceeeeceeee cece ee eaeaeeeeeeeeeeeenenenes 296 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition sse 297 DISPlay WINDow n TRACecst Y SCALe RVALue cessisse nnne 297 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe Unit This command selects the global unit for phase results Setting parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD
421. same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives f
422. sed using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 210 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example 6 3 3 0 Input Output and Frontend Settings The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 211 Amplitude Settings Amplitude
423. see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 234 and CALCulatecn CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 234 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the chirp Configuring Transient Analysis Example CALC CHRD FREQ REF CENTer Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Reference on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer LENGth Percent Defines the length of the measurement range for power results in percent of the chirp length This command is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 236 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Percent percent of the chirp length Example CALC CHRD POW LENG 2e 4 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Length on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin Time Defines the beginning of the measurement range for power results as an offset in sec onds from the chirp start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 236 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC CHRD POW OFFS 50
424. sis Region The analysis region determines which data is displayed on the screen see also chap ter 4 5 Analysis Region on page 23 The region is defined by a frequency span and a time gate for which the results are displayed The time and frequency spans can be defined either as absolute values or relative to the full capture buffer Both methods can be combined for example by defining an absolute frequency span and a relative time gate Data Acquisition and Analysis Region Analysis Bandwidth Analysis Region Defines the absolute width of the frequency span for the analysis region It is centered around the point defined by the Delta Frequency Remote command CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency BANDwidth on page 240 Delta Frequency Analysis Region Defines the center of the frequency span for the analysis region It is defined as an off set from the center frequency Remote command CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency DELTa on page 240 Time Gate Length Analysis Region Defines the absolute length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region Remote command CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME LENGth on page 241 Time Gate Start Analysis Region Defines the starting point of the time span for the analysis region The starting point is defined as a time offset from the capture start time Remote command CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME STARt on page 242 Linked analysis bandwidth Analysi
425. sk Evaluation Evaluation basis Signal characteristics Hop Chirp Results Table Analysis region Hop Chirp Statistics Table Parameter Distribution Parameter Trend Online UO data transfer analysis RF Spectrum Full capture buffer Spectrogram RF Power Time Domain PM Time Domain FM Time Domain PM Time Domain Wrapped requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H All evaluation modes available for Transient Analysis are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual By default the Transient Analysis results are displayed in the following windows e RF Spectrum full capture buffer e FM Time Domain analysis region e Spectrogram full capture buffer e RF Power Time Domain analysis region If the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed the default result dis plays are e RF Spectrum full capture buffer e FM Time Domain analysis region Spectrogram full capture buffer e Frequency Deviation Time Domain hop chirp e Hop Chirp Result Table analysis region The following evaluation methods are available for Transient Analysis EE eege gege eege gees 59 EE E EE 59 RF Power Heimann iecore repete tret kp tek acr k maa tUe ERR e eL REES scd Ee 60 PM Wie DOMA iire niise anaa E aa EE a aa Geacbidee Gudea tsadaseeven AN 61 Frequency Deviation Time Domain oci teen ioter a 61
426. specific to the appli cation All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the Transient Analysis Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command e How to Perform Measurements in the Transient Analysis Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup Remote Commands for Transient Analysis Remote commands required to configure and perform Transient Analysis in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the env
427. sponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 118 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 242 D 7 1 7 2 Display Configuration Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analy sis functions in the base unit except for the special window functions
428. start lt Reserved gt The third and fourth value are reserved for future uses Example CALC SGR TST ON Activates the time stamp CALC SGR TST DATA ALL Returns the starting times of all frames sorted in a descending order Usage Query only Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Timestamp on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe State This command activates and deactivates the time stamp If the time stamp is active some commands do not address frames as numbers but as relative time values CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 322 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 318 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 301 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC SGR TST ON CALC SPEC TST ON Activates the time stamp Manual operation See Timestamp on page 137 SENSe WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram DETector FUNCtion lt Detector gt This command queries or sets the spectrogram detector type for the specified window Parameters lt Detector gt SUM AVERage RMS MAXimum MINimum SAMPle SUM Calculates the sum of all values in one sample point AVERage Calculates the linear average of all values in one sample point RMS Calculates the RMS of all values in one sample point MAXimum Determines the largest of all values in one sample point MI
429. t DATA X Trace This remote control command returns the X values only for the trace in the selected result display Depending on the type of result display and the scaling of the x axis this can be either the pulse number or a timestamp for each detected pulse in the capture buffer Retrieving Results This command is only available for graphical displays except for the Magnitude Cap ture display Query parameters Trace TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 TRACe5 TRACe6 The trace number whose values are to be returned Usage Query only 11 9 4 Exporting Table Results to an ASCII File Table results can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications Useful commands for exporting table results described elsewhere FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 368 Remote commands exclusive to exporting table results TEE een Re RE 367 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe lt Columns gt lt FileName gt This command exports result table data from the specified window to an ASCii file DAT For details on the file format see chapter A 1 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 380 Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select
430. t Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Signal ID Auto ID Bias Value TTE 10 0 dB BES SOUS REED TOTO RT DOE LCD S SEI DL 84 L Write to CVL table riam rrr ritate retta rae nee 85 Input Output and Frontend Settings LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 191 Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in the VSA the I Q Analyzer or the Real Time application for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 192 Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID Ho
431. t QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the Average Phase Deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm lt QueryRange gt This command queries Maximum Phase Deviation from the Result Table Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Deviation Peak on page 55 SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp PHASe MAXPm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the Maximum Phase Deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp PHASe RMSPm lt QueryRange gt This command queries the RMS Phase Deviation from the Result Table Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp
432. t and waits until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieve trace data for RF Power Time Domain TRAC1 DATA TRACe1 TRAC1 DATA X TRACel Retrieve trace length for single transient DISP WIND2 TRAC1 LENG Retrieve table results for first 10 hops CALC5 HOPD TABL RES 1 10 CALC5 HOPD STAT DATA Store all enabled traces in all windows to a CSV file MMEM STOR TA MEAS C R_S Instr MyMeas csv 11 11 4 11 11 5 Programming Examples Programming Example Analyzing Parameter Distribution This example demonstrates how to analyze parameter distribution for a hopped signal in a remote environment It can be performed subsequently to the measurement described in chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 92 2 29 2 Adding a parameter distribution result Result displays upper row 1 RF Power Time Domain full capture 2 Average Frequency dist vs count middle row 3 Spectrogram full capture default 4 RF Spectrum A Region bottom row 5 Hop Results table default 6 Hop Statistics table LAY REPL WIND 2 PDIS Configure parameter distribution 20 bins CALC2 DIST NBIN 20 CALC2 DIST HOP FREQ FREQ COUN Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieve results for parameter distribution CALC2 DIST X CALC2 DIST Y
433. t corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 153 um PEINE VV RDUM MCN RN UNS User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 326 11 7 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 153 See Restore Original Display on page 154 See RK Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 154 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the Transient Analysis application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 5 Data Acquisition on page 221 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n
434. t corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 153 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 325 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis ESE EEE SE SS EE SS EEE EE EE EE EEE EEE ET DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 153 See Restore Original Display on page 154 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 154 11 6 13 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 326 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 327 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower lef
435. t finished Please reconnect RTO CH1 to FSW IF OUT 2 GHz Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel K K a a a a e E In order to switch from alignment mode to measurement mode move the cable from the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE back to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connec tor so that it is then connected to the CH1 input on the oscilloscope If UNCAL is displayed alignment was not yet performed successfully If both alignment steps were performed successfully the date of alignment is indicated Remote commands SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe on page 205 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE on page 206 6 3 2 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Settings dialog box User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 93 Input Output and Frontend Settings Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz ize Stepsize VIER 1 0 MHz uci I E IE 94 Canter Frequency 9Itepsiza EE 94 Frequency Offset 94 Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 210 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decrea
436. t from an UO data file the RUN SINGLE function starts a single mea surement i e analysis of the stored UO data while the RUN CONT function repeat edly analyzes the same data from the file Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R_S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Pre trigger and post trigger samples In applications that use pre triggers or post triggers if no pre trigger or post trigger samples are specified in the UO data file or too few trigger samples are provided to satisfy the requirements of the application the missing pre or post trigger values are filled up with zeros Superfluous samples in the file are dropped if necessary For pre trigger samples values are filled up or omitted at the beginning of the capture buffer for post trigger samples values are filled up or omitted at the end of the capture buffer 4 10 3 Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage sup ply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise Source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 39 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics IEN External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itse
437. t markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics 1 3 2 1 3 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Scre
438. t n gt TRENd CHIRp FREQuency lt YAxis gt lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis and y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp trends over time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVGFm CHERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm CHERror Chirp state deviation FREQuency Average frequency MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation lt XAxis gt BEGin BEGin Chirp Begin Usage Setting only Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp FREQuency X lt XAxis gt Configures the x axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp frequency param eters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt XAxis gt AVGFm CHERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm CHERror Chirp state deviation FREQuency Average frequency MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt TRENd CHIRp FREQuency Y lt YAxis gt Configures the y axis of the Parameter Trend result display for chirp frequency param eters The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt YAxis gt AVGFm CHERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm CHERror Chirp state deviation FREQuency Average frequency MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation Usa
439. table can only be configured manually if CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes AUTO is OFF The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt ChirpRate gt Default unit HZ lt Tolerance gt Tolerance above or below the nominal chirp rate Default unit HZ Example CALC CHRD STAT 1e6 0 3 1e5 0 4 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Frequency Offset Chirp Rate on page 73 See Tolerance on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes NUMBer This command queries the number of states in the state table The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt States gt Range 0 to 1000 Usage Query only Manual operation See Hop Chirp State Index on page 73 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes TABLe LOAD Filename Loads the signal state table configuration from the selected file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Loading a signal state table from a file on page 74 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection STATes TABLe SAVE Filename Saves the current signal state table configuration to a file for later use The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CALC CHRD STAT TABL SAVE C R
440. tarting the Transient Analysis Application The Transient Analysis application adds a new application to the R amp S FSW To activate the Transient Analysis application 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the Transient Analysis item Transient Analysis The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the Transient Analysis application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the Transient Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Over R amp S FSW K60 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Application 2 2 view softkey from any menu see chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 68 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections MultiView Spectrum Transient Analysis 1 Ref Level 2 dE Freq 1 Hz Meas Time 10 6 Model Mor Att Meas BW MHz SRate i MHz 1 Full RF Spec a 2 3 F 2 Region FM Time Domain CF 1 0 GH 1001 pts 8 0 MHz Meas BW 80 0 MHz 5 280189 ms 1001 pts 200 0 us 3 Full Spectrogram 4 Hop 1 Frequency Deviation Time Domain CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 0 5 438080058 ms 1001 pts 9 97
441. te Avg Begin Time Frequency Frequency Deviation Frequency Hop State ID No Index ms ms kHz kHz kHz Fig 5 8 Hop Results Table For details on the individual parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 44 or chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 51 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH RTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 251 Hop Chirp Statistics Table Displays statistical values minimum maximum average standard deviation for the measured hop chirp parameters in a table of results This display requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H Both the current capture buffer data and the cummulated captured data from a series of measurements are evaluated The statistics computed only from hops chirps within the current capture buffer are highlighted green For reference the measured parame ters from the Select Hop Select Chirp are also shown highlighted blue The displayed parameters are the same as in the Hop Chirp Results Table and can be configured in the Result Configuration see chapter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 122 IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 64 R amp S9FSW K60 Measurement Results 2 Hop Statistics Dwell Switching State Avg Hop State Relative Freq Dev Time Time Frequency Frequency Deviation Frequency kHz WIER n State Statistic iinet Fig 5 9 Hop Statistics Table For details on the individual parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Paramete
442. te lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 153 11 6 12 5 Marker Search Spectrograms The following commands automatically define the marker and delta marker position in the spectrogram Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m MAXimum PEAK on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 314 CALCulatecn MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 315 E E gt Pd e e CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 315 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimu RIGHt on page 315 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMG ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeed 318 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe essere rennen 318 CAL Culate
443. ted states to the state table Note that a maximum of 1000 states can be defined in one table To determine how many states are currently defined use the CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes NUMBer command The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters start HZ The frequency at which the first hop state will be generated Default unit HZ step HZ The distance between two hop states Default unit HZ number Number of hop states to be generated Range 0 to 1000 number of existing states Example CALC HOPD STAT TABL ADD 1 MHZ 500 KHZ 10 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add to Table on page 75 Configuring Transient Analysis CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe LOAD Filename Loads the signal state table configuration from the selected file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CALC HOPD STAT TABL LOAD C R_S userdata HopStates csv Usage Setting only Manual operation See Loading a signal state table from a file on page 74 CALCulate n HOPDetection STATes TABLe NSTates This command queries the number of hop states to be generated by a subsequent CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe ADD Or CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection STATes TABLe REPLace command The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt NoOfStates gt Range 0 to 1000 Usag
444. tete edet ode tes 115 Ir Settings m 116 Adjusting Settings Automatically 2 tcrra ree t tt enn 118 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Configuration Overview Dvervisw i E iii 10 AF Sues eam 1 Chirp PM Time Domain In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 2 Signal Description on page 70 2 Input and frontend settings See chapter 6 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 76 3 Triggering See chapter 6 4 Trigger Settings on page 100 4 Data acquisition See chapter 6 5 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region on page 107 5 Measurement settings See chapter 6 7 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 113 6 Analysis See chapter 7 An
445. the bandwidth ratio Parameters Bandwidth Ratio Manual operation See ABW RBW on page 111 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow lt n gt RESolution Bandwidth Resolution This command sets the bandwidth resolution in HZ Parameters Bandwidth Resolution Manual operation See RBW on page 111 Selecting the Signal Model The signal model defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method These settings are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed FREI ENeB m Nee NEESS ia paiia KEEN REES 224 SENSe SIGNal MODel Signal Defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method This command is only required if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed Parameters Signal HOP CHIRp NONE HOP Signals hop between random carrier frequencies in short inter vals CHIRp The carrier frequency is either increased or decreased linearly over time NONE No specific signal model is used this is the default setting if no additional options are installed 11 4 8 11 4 8 1 Configuring Transient Analysis Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Hop Model Chirp Model on page 70 Config
446. the beginning of the measurement range for power results as an offset in sec onds from the chirp start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 234 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Time gt Default unit S Example CALC CHRD FREQ OFFS BEG 3e 6 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet END lt Time gt Defines the end of the measurement range for frequency results as an offset in sec onds from the chirp end This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 234 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Time gt Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection FREQuency REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency measurement range The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters Reference CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range is defined in reference to the chirp s rising or falling edge
447. the correspond ing parameters 4 8 Trace Evaluation Chirp Rate Fig 4 12 Measurement range parameters for chirped signals Each range is defined by a reference point an offset and the range length The refer ence point can be either the center or either edge of the hop chirp or a point defined by an offset to one of these characteristic points The range is then centered around this reference point Example In figure 4 11 the indicated measurement range could be defined by the following parameters for example e Reference Hop End e Offset x Alignment right Length L Measurement range vs result range While the measurement range defines which part of the hop chirp is used for individual calculations the result range determines which part is displayed on the screen in the form of AM FM or PM vs time traces see also chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 120 Trace Evaluation Traces in graphical result displays based on the defined result range see chap ter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 120 can be configured for example to perform statistical evaluations over the selected hop chirp or all hops chirps You can configure up to 6 individual traces for the following result displays see chap ter 5 3 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis on page 57 RF Power Time Domain 4 8 1 Trace Evaluation e FM Time Domain Frequency Deviation Time Domain e PM Time Domain e PM T
448. the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 200 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 84 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 198 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 200 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied Input Output and Frontend Settings The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 201 Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRecti
449. the duration or height of the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full measurement time The time gate start is the start of the capture buffer plus an off set defined by CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME STARt on page 242 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant 11 4 12 Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt TimePercent gt percentage of the full measurement time Manual operation See Linked analysis time span on page 110 CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME PERCent STATe lt State gt If activated the length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full measurement time using CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME PERCent on page 241 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ON OFF gt lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Linked analysis time span on page 110 CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME STARt lt StartTime gt Defines the starting point of the time span for the analysis region The starting point is defined as a time offset from the capture start time The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt StartTime gt Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Time Gate Start on
450. the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 221 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 221 6 4 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger and Gate dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger Gate button in the Overview Note that gating is not available for hop measurements R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Diff 0 0 s Offset Slope Rising Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Input Output Type User Defined Level Tow Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 input For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual
451. the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP ID lt QueryRange gt Returns the hop IDs from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm lt QueryRange gt This command queries the Average Phase Deviation from the Result Table Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Deviation Average on page 49 SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP PHASe AVGPm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the Average Phase Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP PHASe MAXPm lt QueryRange gt This com
452. the width of the fre quency span for the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full capture buf fer It is centered around the point defined by CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency DELTa on page 240 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt BWPercent gt percentage of the full analysis bandwidth Manual operation See Linked analysis bandwidth on page 110 CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency PERCent STATe lt State gt If activated the width of the frequency span for the analysis region is defined as a per centage of the full capture buffer using CALCulate lt n gt AR FREQuency PERCent on page 241 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Linked analysis bandwidth on page 110 CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME LENGth lt Length gt Defines the length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Length gt Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 375 Manual operation See Time Gate Length on page 110 CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME PERCent lt TimePercent gt For CALCulate lt n gt AR TIME PERCent STATe TRUE the length of the time gate that is
453. then demodulated if necessary and distributed among the trace points using a detector The time span displayed per division of the diagram is much smaller compared to the initial full data analysis Thus the results of the analysis range become more precise R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics Capture Buffer Detector Full result Bandpass Filter Analysis region result Fig 4 10 Data zoom full result vs analysis region result 4 6 Zooming and Shifting Results As described above Processing data in the analysis region data zoom restricting the results to an analysis region has the same effect as a data zoom the results are recal culated for a restricted data base This is exactly what the Data Zoom s function in the toolbar does it changes the size of the analysis region and re evaluates the new data base Thus if the analysis region is reduced less data is displayed in the same area of the screen thus enlarging the display of the selected data If the analysis region is enlarged more data is dis played The Data Shift function on the other hand does not change the size of the analysis region but the position Thus you can scroll through the signal and analyze several hops chirps after another for example The effects of a data zoom or shift are reflected in the Analysis Region settings of the Data Acquisition dialog box Similarly when the data zoom and shift functions are ap
454. tiion 50 King ies cca rr ntn E E E 50 L Average emgeet 50 Eu 40 MM M H 50 State parameters Hop state parameters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe STATe ALL STATe on page 272 State Index State parameters The nominal frequency levels are numbered consecutively in the Hop States table see chapter 6 2 2 Signal States on page 71 starting at 0 The state of a detected hop is defined as the index of the corresponding nominal frequency Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe STATe INDex on page 272 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP STATe 1NDex on page 345 Timing parameters Hop timing parameters Remote command CALCulate n HOPDetection TABLe TIMing ALL STATe on page 273 Hop Begin Timing parameters The relative time in ms from the capture start at which the signal first enters the toler ance area of a nominal hop within the analysis region The tolerance area is defined by the settling tolerance above and below the defined nominal hop frequencies Remote command Display CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe TIMing BEGin on page 273 Results CALCulate lt n gt HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 333 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin on page 347 Hop Parameters Dwell Time Timing parameters The duration of a hop from begin to end that is the time the s
455. tion for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate n IMMediate on page 245 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 244 Refresh MSRA MSRT only This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA MSRT applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new Sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 246 Measurement Time The measurement time and Record Length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured The maximum measurement time in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the measurement time and thus reducing the available memory space may restrict the number
456. to specific hop or chirp characteristics 0 These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed The Power settings for example determine which part of the hop chirp is used to cal culate the average power in one hop chirp The Frequency Phase settings determine which part of the hop chirp is used to calculate the average frequency phase in one hop chirp The Frequency Phase and Power settings are available when you do one of the fol lowing e From the Overview select Measurement e From the MEAS CONFIG menu select Hop Meas Chirp Meas The ranges for both frequency phase and power measurements are defined by a refer ence point an offset from the reference point and the range length Hop Chirp Measurement Settings Hop Meas if CIS OZ TET ETE Frequency Phase Power Frequency A Reference Length Offset Begin Offset End Fig 6 3 Measurement range settings for hop frequency phase results For details on the measurement range parameters see chapter 4 7 Measurement Range on page 27 aisi TOTO ETT DTE 114 e 5 roten pn a RS Rr gan c astu S NY desti bo need R EY Henri RRAE 115 Offset Begin Offset End 115 Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency phase power measurement range The Offset Begin Offset End is given with respect to this value Edge The measurement range is def
457. tributed there sem n i nmi cii g Ii iei 60dBm 5 0dBm 40dBm SOdBm oos Shape Usi stop C Cold C Radar C Grayscale To set the color curve shape numerically gt Inthe Shape field enter a value to change the shape of the curve e Anegative value 1 to lt 0 focusses the lower values e Odefines a linear distribution e A positive value 70 to 1 focusses the higher values How to Export Table Data The measured result table data can be exported to an ASCII file For each parameter the measured values are output For details on the storage format see chapter A 1 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 380 Table data can be exported either from the Result Configuration dialog box or from the Save Recall menu To export from the Save Recall menu 1 Select an active result table whose data you want to export 2 Select the E Save icon in the toolbar 3 Select the Export softkey 4 If necessary change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file How to Export Table Data 5 Select the ASCII Table Export softkey 6 Inthe file selection dialog box select the storage location and file name for the export file 7 Select Save to close the dialog box and export the table data to the file To export from the Result configuration dialog box 1 Press the Overview softkey Select the Result Config button Select t
458. ts 11 9 6 Exporting UO Results to an iq tar File The I Q data results can be exported to an ig tar file For details see chapter 7 7 Export Functions on page 142 MMEMory STORe lt n gt IO COMME Mi ce deerat Deere t nata et 371 MMEMON STORE AOSTA EE 371 MMEMory STORe lt n gt IQ COMMent lt Comment gt This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containi
459. ts size and position can be moved by tapping and dragging the frame on the touchscreen Furthermore the data zoom and shift functions allow you to change the size and position of the analysis region from any graphical result display see chapter 4 6 Zooming and Shifting Results on page 26 The absolute and relative methods can be combined for example by defining an abso lute frequency span and a relative time gate User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 24 Analysis Region Meas Time Data Acquisition Full Capture Meas Bandwidth 59 Fig 4 9 Visualization of absolute analysis region parameters Processing data in the analysis region data zoom In result displays restricted to the analysis region only the data measured for the specified frequency range and within the defined time gate is considered Furthermore the analysis region data is taken only from the latest data acquisition that is only data that is still in the capture buffer is analyzed Restricting the results to an analysis region has the same effect as a data zoom the results are recalculated for a restricted data base The data in the capture buffer is fil tered by the defined time gate the measured data within that time span then passes a bandpass filter so only the frequency range of interest is analyzed Depending on the selected result display the data is
460. ts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below t
461. tself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If itis provided automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has trig gered due to a measurement start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a measurement start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided o Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 40 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 11 Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA or MSRT operating mode The main difference between the two modes is that in MSRA mode an UO analyzer performs data acquisition while in MSRT mode a real time measurement is performed to capture data In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRA MSRT applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis
462. ttenuation center frequency measurement bandwidth sample rate cannot be changed The measurement time can only be decreased in order to perform measurements on an extract of the availa ble data only Note Even when the file input is deactivated the input file remains selected and can be activated again quickly by changing the state Remote command INPut SELect on page 190 Select UO Data File Opens a file selection dialog box to select an input file that contains UO data Note that the UO data must have a specific format iq tar as described in chap ter A 2 I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 381 The default storage location for UO data files is C R_S Instr user Remote command INPut FILE PATH on page 204 External Mixer Settings Access Overview Input Frontend Input Source External Mixer or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer If installed the optional external mixer can be configured from the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode Input Output and Frontend Settings For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual E TEEN 80 2r uA UI TTE 83 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables 2 n ieri ient eee te ce ette tice 85 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Table 86 Mixer Settings Access Overview Input Frontend Input Sou
463. udes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 150 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 13 11 6 13 1 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom BISPlayDWINDowensZOONDAREA utin eate crm actrees adler 325 DiSblavf WiNDow nzlLZOOM STATe nennen nennen nnne nnne nnne rasis nean nn nennen 326 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm re 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower lef
464. uency Chirping on page 21 Settling Tolerance t Chirp End Chirp Begin hirp Length Chirp Rate vs Time Chirp Rate Hz us ayers diu Ser Nominal Chirp Rate Time s Fig 5 3 Definition of the main chirp parameters and characteristic values In order to obtain these results select the corresponding parameter in the result config uration see chapter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 122 or apply the required SCPI parameter to the remote command see chapter 11 6 5 Table Configuration on page 261 and chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Information on Detected Hops on page 331 Chirp ID and Chirp number Each individual chirp can be identified by a timestamp which corresponds to the abso lute time the beginning of the chirp was detected In addition each chirp is provided with a consecutive number which starts at 1 for each new measurement This is useful to distinguish chirps in a measurement quickly Remote commands SENSe CHIRp ID on page 357 SENSe CHIRp NUMBer on page 357 ENS paramielels eege 52 Bh o de MN 52 Timing BE EE 52 bt o1 52 E EO EDO eee reper eritaws e qmm eelere det 53 L Chirp EE 53 Re eene 53 L Ohip State David ioc etit rep teet aen eret uro malis 53 L Average eege ac a n ipa octo Cer 54 Chirp Parameters L Frequency Deviation Peak sesenta tnter tthtntn tete tnnenenas 54 L Frequency Deviation MS
465. uffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp STATe lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp states from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See State Index on page 52 Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp STATe AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp STATe MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp STATe MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp STATe SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp states from the statistics table for the speci fied chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp begin time from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp Begin on page 52 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin MAXim
466. uffer may be of interest In some cases it may be useful to restrict analysis to a specific user definable region or to a selected individual chirp rate or hop Which evaluation basis is available for which result display is indicated in table 5 1 Some of these settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed These settings are available from the MEAS menu Full Capture Region Analysis Hop Chimie 129 Select Hop Select CMP ice ertet e n S ert eerta tr nerd eee Rr aun 130 Full Capture Region Analysis Hop Chirp For some result displays you can select the basis used for analysis e the full capture buffer the selected Analysis Region e anindividual selected hop chirp only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed To select a hop chirp for the latter case select the Selected Hop Selected Chirp softkey in the Meas Config menu see Select Hop Select Chirp on page 130 The currently selected hop chirp is highlighted blue in the Result Table and Statistic Table displays As soon as a new hop chirp is selected all hop chirp specific displays are automati cally updated Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt EVAL on page 257 7 4 Trace Settings Select Hop Select Chirp Defines the individual hop or chirp from the current capture buffer for which results are calculated and d
467. um lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp begin from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp length from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp Length on page 53 SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp begin from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp rate from the Results table for the speci
468. ument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 367 User Manual 1175 6478 02 07 123 Result Configuration 7 2 3 Parameter Configuration for Result Displays 7 2 3 1 For parameter trend or distribution displays you can define which parameters are to be evaluated in each window Parameter Distribution Configuration ucc adv aiaa 124 e Parameter Trend Configuration inire a aa 125 Parameter Distribution Configuration The parameter distribution evaluations allow you to visualize the number of occurran ces for a specific parameter value within the current capture buffer For each parame ter distribution window you can configure which measured parameter is to be dis played d sul Lo i Do Bees e 2 Transient Analvsi c Result Range Table Config Parameter Scale Units X Axis Hop Begin Y Axis RIONIEIIBSTITS 100 Distribution S The Parameter Distribution settings are available by selecting the Result Config softkey or the Result Config button in the Overview and switching to the Parame te
469. uring Signal Detection The signal detection settings define the conditions under which a hop chirp is detected within the input signal These commands are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed e UGS RITE MEE 225 Hop BEE 228 Chirp States CAL Culate nz CHhRfDetechon LENGu AUTO 225 CAL Culate nz CHh Detechon LENGih MANimum eene nn nnne nnns 225 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection LENGth MiNmmmum eene 226 CAL Culate lt n gt 2CHRDetection STATESIAUT e ME 226 CAL Culate nz CHbRDetechion SGTATestDATA ene nnns 226 CAL Culate nz CHh Detechon SfATeshNUlMer nennen nsn nnns n an 227 CAL Culate nz CHh fDetechon SiATesTABlelOAf nennen nnns nans 227 CAL Culate nz CHh fDetechon SiATesTABLe2AVE sentes nasse n is 227 CALCulate n CHRDetection LENGth AUTO State This command activates and deactivates the auto length setting for chirp detection The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CALC CHRD LENG AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 75 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection LENGth MAXimum Time This command sets the maximum time for chirp detection The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Time Range 0 000000752 to 0 00035 RST 0 00035
470. urn useful results aaa a a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument Configuring Transient Analysis RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON sms Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA ssssseseses Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB a Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finish
471. us State This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 247 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 116 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 116
472. used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm lt PowRip gt Power level measured during the chirp ripple time Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm Example CALC3 CHRD TABLe 1 10 Result Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 373 Usage Query only Manual operation See State Index on page 52 See Chirp Begin on page 52 See Chirp Length on page 53 See Chirp Rate on page 53 See Chirp State Deviation on page 53 See Average Frequency on page 54 See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 54 See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 54 See Frequency Deviation Average on page 55 See Phase Deviation Peak on page 55 See Phase Deviation RMS on page 55 See Phase Deviation Average on page 56 See Average Power on page 57 CALCulate lt n gt CHRDetection TOTal This command returns the total number of chirps found The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt TotalChirps gt Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the average Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp
473. utput is automatically deactivated It is not reactivated when the B2000 option is switched off Remote command OUTPut IF SOURce on page 209 Input Output and Frontend Settings IF Wide Out Frequency Defines or indicates the frequency at which the IF signal level is provided at the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if IF Video Output is set to IF Note The IF output frequency of the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency It is indi cated in this field when the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used automatically instead of the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if the bandwidth extension hardware option R amp S FSW B160 U160 is activated i e for bandwidths 80 MHz Remote command OUTPut IF IFFRequency on page 209 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 208 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPU
474. vant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC2 MARK LINK ON Manual operation See Linked Markers on page 149 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search CALCulate n MARKer m PEXOursion eese nenhn nennen ener nnne an 313 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows m n are irrelevant The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak Search The unit depends on the measurement Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 152 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal MaIKGES contr ee ee teo er eaaet ee hr le etai 313 e Positioning Delta ET rte rri irre o rie erre etre ited 315 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALC latesn gt MARKer lt m gt MAXIMUM LEF T i taies coacto deed 314 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT esee ennsnasesnh snas sese s san 314 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK nnne 314 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzMAximumRlGHt esee een nnne n nsns nnns aan 314 CAL Culate nz M Abkerzmmz MiNimum LEET 314 Analyzing Transient Effects CALGulatesn MARKersm MIBNIRURE NEXT 12th cna d dde curata t n c n e e 315 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNi
475. ve eg d tH suse ETT Ecke vM cce SEX Ae sar 363 SENSe CHIRp STATe MAXIUTI s ceci o tror erben rrr en esrin 363 SENSe CHIRp STATe SDEViation ettet ttt ttt ttt ntis SENSe CHIRP STAT ccscsscssssssesssssssssssssecsssssvesssssecsssssevessssuvsssssssesssssecsssssuvsssssusssssiessssssessesseesssseeessaseees 362 ISENSeICHiRp TIMing BEGin AvERage traati nieaaernrsatiraanenranen 363 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin MAXimum estt ttt ttt ttt od 363 ISENSe ICHiRp TMing BEGircMiNimum ttt ttt 363 ISENSe ICHiRp TlMing BEGin SDENiegion ttt 363 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin E ISENSe ICHiRp TIMing LENGt AvERage ttt ttti 364 ISENSe ICHiRp TIMing LENGtbcMANimum ttt ttt ttti 364 ISENSe ICHiRp TMing LENGtbcMiNimum ttt nntis 364 ISENSeICHiRp TIMing LENGt SDENieton ttti 364 SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth ettet ttt ttt 364 ISENSe ICHIRpCTHIMingRATE AVERage ttt ttt ttt 365 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE MAXimum SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE MiNimum naana traannnraa neern an 365 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE SDEViation stt ttt 365 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE stets sss 364 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND 197 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS ttt ttt ttt ttt oobis 198 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt 198 SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr ect ttt ttt ttt ttt tol 2d 198 ISENSe JCORbechorCvt
476. ve marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker Spectrogram Settings This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more details see chapter 4 9 1 Time Frames on page 34 For more information see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 16 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 301 Time Resolution The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The shorter the time span used for each FFT the shorter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes In Auto mode the optimal resolution is determined automatically according to the data acquisition settings In Manual mode you must define the time resolution in seconds Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO on page 303 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution on page 302 History Depth Sets the number of frames that the R amp S FSW stores in its memory If the memory is full the R amp S FSW deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and replaces them with the new data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 302 Timestamp Activates and deactivates the timestamp The timestamp shows the system t
477. wever the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 192 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference Sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 84 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 192 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Input Output and Frontend Settings The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion
478. x EMAXIDUImI s c cot tet eati tnter cnet rette etre 346 SENSe IHOP STATe INDeXEMINIFRUEI icai e treu ehe t rhe ne reb eee ete eee crees 346 SENSe HOP STATe INDex SDEViation 346 ISENSe HOP STATetlNfDesft ttt niant r nraat iraan e nra anen 345 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin AVERAQe sssssssssssssessssseessssssvesssssvessssseesssssvsssssssessssivesssssivessssuessasieteseseees 347 ISENSe HOb TlMineg BEGln M Aximum aaarnas an 347 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin MlINimum ettet ttt ttt 347 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin SDEViation stt ttt 347 ISENSe HOb TlMing BE 347 Ee Tele Ga Ne RR Be netten rettet tne ettet teet nete ten ttes 348 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELE MAXIITIUITT iiss ccce teer eee tente ttc eec eter eee cenae en Eee 348 ISENSe JHOP TIMing DWELEMI INIFQUETY o etu eor oe e pese enne tutt evene treat REESE 348 SENSe IHOP TIMing DWELESDEWVIGtIOIT cerent ett be tbt inerte cete etienne 348 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI s SENSe JHOP TIMing SWITching AVERGQS unto rrt deett te eter prennent 349 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching M IN deed te tenti te tto ertet ntt eere 349 SENSe HOP TIMing SWI Tching MINimUtmY nirien yaaa ieceri aaee tha teet anke dada 349 SENSe HOP TIMing SWlITchirig SDEVIAtlOFi cacao toten te N ERE tiere eene 349 SENS HOPE TIMING NEIE eege EERSTEN 348 E El E SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH SENSe MIXerBIAS EEOW E
479. xample DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 254 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG Analyzing Transient Effects DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect This command sets the focus on the selected result display window This window is then the active window Example DISP WIND1 SEL Sets the window 1 active Usage Setting only 11 6 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix lt n gt always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 186 BERT Ed elt RE 251 LAYOURCAT alog UD 57i ri 253 LAYoutTIDENt y WIBDoW
480. y STARt on page 193 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 193 Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 193 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 82 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 194 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 197 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 193 Input Output and Frontend Settings Mixer
481. y Deviation RMS on page 47 Default unit kHz lt FMDevAvg gt Average deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal linear hop frequency as defined in the Hop States table The devia tion is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Frequency Deviation Average on page 48 Default unit kHz lt PMDevMax gt Maximum deviation of the hop phase from the nominal hop phase as defined in the Hop States table The deviation is cal culated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Phase Deviation Peak on page 48 Default unit kHz Retrieving Results lt PMDevRMS gt RMS deviation of the hop phase from the nominal linear hop phase as defined in the Hop States table The deviation is cal culated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Phase Deviation RMS on page 49 Default unit kHz lt PMDevAvg gt Average deviation of the hop phase from the nominal linear hop phase as defined in the Hop States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Phase Deviation Average on page 49 Default unit kHz lt PowMin gt Minimum power level measured during a hop Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm lt PowMax gt Maximum power level measured during a ho
482. y are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 245 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode Sweep Settings If the Sequencer is off only the evalua
483. y from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the maximum Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 47 Retrieving Results SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the maximum Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP FREQuency RELFrequency lt QueryRange gt Returns the relative hop to hop frequency from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the cu
484. ys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Peak e EE 152 ee D EN 152 Sese el NUIT BEEN 152 Search Next Minimum 153 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 314 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 316 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 316 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 315 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 315 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 316 Zoom Functions Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt

R&S®FSW-K60 Transient Analysis User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSW-K60 Transient Analysis User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSW-K60 Transient Analysis User Manual